Home

Owners Manual - Dealer e

1. 120 Daytime Running Lights 120 Dealer Service lees 312 Defroster Rear Window 158 Diagnostic System Onboard 309 Diesel Engine Maintenance 378 Diesel Fuel System Re Priming 225 Diesel Fuel Water Separator 225 Dimmer Switch Headlight 119 Dipsticks Qil ENGINE oid ede 9 Repeat 312 lower Steering idussaesaca sos ER RR e gos 322 Disabled Vehicle Towing 44 302 Disarming Theft System suus 31 Disposal Engine Oll isses ebrei 316 Used Engine Fluids 004 316 Door Locks 5 2 e ea e Y 3 Rr 20 Door Locks Automatic 0000008 23 Door Opener Garage 0 000000 cae 139 DOOfS rieseni ae eH ORE RANG bod E 20 Drive Belts 4 04 0009 chee a des 316 DEVAN as tates LE 249 Off Pavement eces pesa ow ER ee eal CASS 249 Off Road Cos oia dade dran Maree Gua athe 249 Electric Remote Mirrors 0000 eee 83 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary 148 Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Speed Control 404 INDEX aa Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 175 Electronic Vehicle Information Center 131 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 236 Hazard Warning Flasher 292 Jacking 25 penpan a eh RE eie Per ne 294 Jump Staring seca cea REESE has 299 Tow Hooks
2. 0 250 Tire Spinning xev eV ae eH A ee EIS 265 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 251 Tread Wear Indicators lisse 266 Fill Climbing cmm te s 251 Replacement Tires 000000 266 Traction Downhill llle 252 Alignment And Balance 267 After Driving Off Road 253 W Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped 268 en STARTING AND OPERATING 219 Tire Pressure Monitoring Base System 268 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 280 Tire Pressure Monitoring Premium System 270 W Fuel Requirements Diesel Engines 280 General Information 4 273 W Fuel Tank Filler Cap Gas Cap 281 a Tite Chane yawns eae bee KS ERROR ES 274 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 283 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 2 5 ME Trailer Towing sace sue os x terae 283 H Fuel Requirements Gasoline Engines 276 Warranty Requirements 284 Reformulated Gasoline lius 277 W Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 287 5 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 278 Towing 2WD Models sss 287 MMT In Gasoline sx ri RS 278 Towing 4WD Models 287 Materials Added To Fuel 279 MaScOw PIOW iere edere Rh 289 Fuel System Cautions
3. 279 220 STARTING AND OPERATING ME STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Manual Transmission Apply the parking brake place the gearshift control lever in N Neutral and depress the clutch pedal before starting vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system which requires the clutch to be fully depressed before starting the vehicle 4WD Models Only In 4L mode this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor This feature enhances off road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to depress the clutch pedal The 4 LO MODE indicator light will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the selector lever in the N Neutral or P Park position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range STARTING AND OPERATING 221 Normal Starting Gasoline Engines Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds tu
4. 9 Monitor Tire Pressure System 268 Mopar Parts 2x9 me n RSS 311 395 Multi Function Control Lever 118 Navigation System 0 000 e eee 203 New Vehicle Break In Period 73 Occupant Classification System 55 Occupant Restraints ss sees sess asin ss 37 Octane Rating Gasoline 00 276 Odometer regses esmda s ankaa ee eee 171 THp perese e iae a o e E De EE 171 Off Pavement Driving 249 341 Off Road Driving esee 249 341 OIL Engifi 3320 ingen aa aage x eR E OE OR RR 312 Capacity seas d b e pepe x RR 356 Change Interval 2 esee RR eem 313 Checking ee s esse aie al 312 I PSHICK CET 312 Identification Logo 6 eee 314 Materials Added to 00000 315 Pressure Warning Light 172 Recommendation less 314 315 356 Synthetic se sh haved ance REL os an Sede ee 315 VISCOSIY cosmos aces ER Bend ees 314 315 356 Oil Filter Selection os corau 0 0 0 000 e eee 316 Oil Pressure Light x 4 2 awed Soe RE 172 Onboard Diagnostic System 309 310 Opener Garage Door 0 00 eee eee 139 Organizer Cargo ee 154 Outside Rearview Mirrors 2 82 Overhead Console Lus eee poen Ros 129 Overheating Erigine ceesti mei a e Pedes 293 ee INDEX 411 Owner s Manual 0 0 00 eee eee 396 Paint Care cc 4 ved antic ak wk ee a A 337
5. es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Program Type Radio Display Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode The radio display will flash SEEK and the selected PTY program type when searching for the next PTY station If no station is found with the selected PTY program type the radio will return to the last station If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station By pressing the SCAN button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will stop at every PTY station on the band and list each corresponding program type in the radio display 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Time Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual CD Diagnostic Indicators When driving over
6. Cavity Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Description 19 20 Amp Yel Frt Fog Lights Trailer Tow 30 15 Amp Blue Heated Seat Module low Stop and Turn Lights 31 Spare 20 5pare 32 10 Amp Red Wiper Switch Front and 21 10Amp Red Radio Rear Wipers 22 20 Amp Yel Power Sunroof Relay 33 10 Amp Red SKIM Module Data Link low Antenna Module Export Connector Only 34 15 Amp Blue Body Control Module 23 Spare Cluster Interior Lights 24 10 Amp Red PDC Blower Motor Hands Free Module Radio 25 10 Amp Red Heated Seat Switches HVAC ea Control Head Trailer Tow Export Only Battery Charge 35 Spare 26 10 Amp Red Headlight High Beam Right 36 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module 27 10Amp Red Headlight High Beam Left Module Right Front Seat 28 Spare 37 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module 29 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors Rear Win dow Defroster Indicator EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 Cavity Fuse Description 38 10 Amp Red ABS Controller Shifter As sembly 39 10 Amp Red Hazard Flasher Turn Signals Backup Lamp Switch Manual Transmission Only Transmission Range Switch Automatic Transmis sion Only Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri bution center located in the engine compartment near the battery This power center houses plug in Cartridge fuses which replace in line fusible links The power Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Gas
7. 380 SCHEDULE B DIESEL ENGINES MEM Schedule B Diesel Engines e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km Follow schedule B if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C Trailer towing us Li ey Grane e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service Extensive engine idling e Off road or desert driving e Driving in dusty conditions en SCHEDULE B DIESEL ENGINES 381 Miles 6 250 12 500 18 750 25 000 31 250 Kilometers 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element Replace as X X X X X necessary Replace the engine air filter element X X Inspect the boost pressure solenoid filter Replace X X X X X as necessary Replace the fuel filter water separator unit X Inspect the brake linings X X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X X M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 382 SCHEDULE B DIESEL ENGINES MEM Miles 37 500 43 750 50 000 56 250 62 500 Kilometers 60 000 70 000 80 000 90 000 100 000 Change the
8. NOTE The backup lights will come on when your vehicle is in R Reverse gear and the ignition is in the ON position 228 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM WARNING When parking your vehicle always leave a manual transmission in first gear and apply the parking brake fully to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never use any gear as a substitute for the parking brake CAUTION To drive as safely as possible and to prolong the life of your manual transmission follow these tips e Before shifting from a forward gear into reverse or from reverse to a forward gear stop vehicle com pletely Otherwise accelerated transmission wear may result Do not operate at sustained high engine or road speeds in lower gears Engine damage may result Do not downshift into a low gear while traveling at too high a speed for that gear Engine clutch or transmis sion damage may result Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal This causes heat buildup and damages the clutch When you slow down or go up a grade downshift as speed requires or the engine may overheat Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal The clutch may be damaged During cold weather you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal Push in the clutch pedal completely when shifting Otherwise transmission or clutch damage may result es STARTING AND OP
9. 6 Shift automatic transmission into D Drive or manual transmission into any forward gear Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment vehicle unattended with the transfer case m the N should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The Neut tai position without divf fully engaging the airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the 5 parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect edly or could fail to deploy during a collision SNOW PLOW disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Do not add a snow plow winches or any other aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system and you could be injured WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS H Hazard Warning Flashers 292 Jacking Instructions lille 296 B If Your Engine Overheats issu 2903 W Jump Starting Procedure H Jacking And Tire Changing
10. You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the
11. M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 372 SCHEDULE B GASOLINE ENGINES ME Miles 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 Kilometers 173 000 178 000 182 000 187 000 192 000 Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if X belt was previously replaced Drain and refill the transfer case fluid X Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze at 120 X months if not replaced at 102 000 miles 163 000 km Inspection and service should be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all receipts t Applies only if vehicle is used for frequent trailer towing or fleet commercial service This maintenance is recommended by the manufac turer to the owner but it is not required to maintain emissions warranty tOff highway operation trailer towing taxi limousine bus snow plowing or other types of commercial service or prolonged operation with heavy loading especially in hot weather require front and rear axle service indicated with a f in Schedule B Perform these services if the vehicle is usually operated under these conditions E SCHEDULE A GASOLINE ENGINES 373 Schedule A Gasoline Engines Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 Kilometers 10 000 19 000 29 000 38 000 48 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 Change the engine
12. e If frequent antifreeze coolant additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant anti freeze concentration to 50 HOAT engine coolant anti freeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean Also if your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or col
13. less 335 Transfer Case s eme ra 336 Front Rear Axle Fluid less 337 Appearance Care And Protection From COrosiON ucc x eR ESO RR SPESE 337 B Fuse Panel 0 0 es 342 Interior Fuses 2 2 2 2 0 0000 eee eee 342 Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center 345 WM Vehicle Stotag cua knee cee Ke Kaen de om 349 Bl Replacement Bulbs 00040 350 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305 M Bulb Replacement 0 0000 351 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 355 Head Light s 0s ees orae Pa e Rede s 351 W Fluid Capacities c a9 coa x rre exa 356 Front Turn Signal vocem eed eem 352 ll Recommended Fluids Lubricants And Front Fog Light Front Fascia Mounted 353 Gentine Parts 2 25 dada es pura e e e 357 Light Bar an oer ene Ne gases cause 354 PUES Te feed LR iiie good Se a arro TE 358 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Back Up Erin c PEDES 355 306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN 2 4L ENGINE COOLANT BOTTLE WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID ENGINE ENGINE BRAKE OIL FILL OIL DIPSTICK BATTERY AIR CLEANER POWER POWER FILTER STEERING DISTRIBUTION FLUID CENTER 80cb201a es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307 3 7L ENGINE COOLANT ENGINE COOLANT ENGINE OIL TRANSMISSION BRAKE MASTER PRESSURE CAP RESERVOIR DIPSTICK DIPSTICK CYLINDER WINDSHIELD POWER WASHER Ae ae DISTRIBUTION BATTERY R
14. 00040 25 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To Unlock The Doors seres 25 Power Windows If Equipped 35 To Lock The Doors lesser 26 Wind Buffeting llle 36 To Unlatch The Swing Gate Flip Up Window 26 Mi Occupant Restraints 0040 37 Panic Alatm ERE saa FW ack Bae 27 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0 38 To Use The Panic Alarm 27 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 39 To Program Additional Transmitters 28 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 43 General Information sls 28 Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped 44 Transmitter Battery Service 29 Energy Management Feature 45 ll Security Alarm System If Equipped 30 Seat Belt Pretensioners llle 46 To Set The Alarm 0000005 30 Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Use Reminder System To Disarm The System eee eee 31 BeltAlert xiii Sieve Sages oxy 46 Mi Rear Swing Gate 00000000004 31 Pam BINS RCE aE DADO WGI eh oar uiid ioi ad Seat Belt Extender 0 005 48 M Windows en RR 35 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Exhaust Gas see
15. 294 W Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped Jack Location 2 02 essor LES RARE RIAL 295 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle Spare TireStowage o sea dadare aea eevee 295 2WD Models Only lt crcorerosionearrad ia Preparations For Jacking 296 AWD Models Only 0 0000 292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Your vehicle s hazard warning flasher is an emergency warning system When you activate it all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Use it when your vehicle is disabled on or near the road It warns other drivers to steer clear of you and your vehicle This is an emergency warning system not to be used when the vehicle is in motion To activate the warning flashers press the button on the instrument panel between center air outlets To turn the warning flashers off press the button again Hazard Warning Switch NOTE With extended use the flashers may run down your battery EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transmission in N Neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it of
16. NOTE If the vehicle is started in cold outside tempera tures shifts into Overdrive may be delayed Normal Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate temperature Refer to the Note under Iorque Con verter Clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets too hot the trans mission may downshift out of Overdrive or engage overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission cools down After cooldown Overdrive will resume normal operation 2 Second For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pave ment or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to 2nd gear Will not shift to 3rd 1 First For hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds CAUTION e Never press on the accelerator pedal with the engine running vehicle in gear and the brakes applied Always apply the brakes when stopped on a incline Failure to follow these instructions can cause overheating and damage to the trans mission When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween First and R Reverse do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result EE STARTING AND OPERATING 235 Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil tem
17. pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication U joints cardan joints are sealed and do not require lubrication Prop shafts yokes ball joints and other driveline and steering components may be provided with grease fittings for lubrication Lubrication of these com ponents at the intervals specified in the appropriate ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 is very important particularly if your vehicle is subjected to off road or other heavy duty use See your authorized dealer for complete service information Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors swing gate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper fun
18. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station TheI M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow conta
19. MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 392 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service cont
20. NOTE The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision which includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows t
21. Paint Damage coste oes 4b ae Poe ES 337 Panic Alarm Lua sack erg eb ee EG 27 Parking Brake sesepeun llle 245 Passing Light llle 119 PCY Valve quede a RA awa RAN UE 319 Pets iu a Rer ik Rone FE Aa FS 72 Phone Cellular eee eee 85 Phone Hands Free 0000 e eee 85 Placard Tire and Loading Information 259 Polishing and Waxing 0005 338 Power Distribution Center 0 000020 345 Door Locks cue eat Ris Oa ea ace an eS 23 MICFOES ues dE SS eos RE ERROR a oes 83 Outlet s o dae UII ERN ante ohare E ins 148 Seats quud use Rieke BP sued 43 111 DLCCTING uris inb arse Edere a Ree PR ER 2 322 SUnfOO ir bee uon dore er wed ru P ep 145 WindOWS soa tact bo ee ec ORIS DRS 35 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 47 Preparation for Jacking 0 296 Pretensioners Seat Belts s coss su weave RE ged baa 46 Programmable Electronic Features 132 Programming Transmitters 0 28 Radial Ply Tires 2 930094 m 9 SR gee ates as 265 Radio Broadcast Signals 04 177 Radio Operation a s jae e eek 189211 Radio Satellite llle 203 Radio Sound Systems 178 189 195 Rear Axle ae cnn RR De SO RR ede 245 337 Rear Swing Gate uisa c an kae does eses 31 Rear Window Defroster osiers aci amacia a disa 158 Rear Window Features 412 INDEX EE Rear Wiper Washer isses 156
22. The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e You may eject a disc with the radio OFF The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to insert a disc with the radio OFF e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the display will show the time of day If you insert a disc with the ignition OFF the display will show the time of day for about 5 seconds then go out Seek Button Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection EJT CD Eject Button Press this button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the radio mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE FF TUNE RW Press FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner Program Button 4 Random Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the
23. When it comes to service remember that the manufac turer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction en INTRODUCTION 7 WARNING HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section Ee Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain contains the information you desire vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals This manual contains WARNINGS against operating known to the State of California to cause cancer and procedures which could result in an accident or bodily birth defects or other reproductive harm injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions The detailed index at the rear of the manual contains a complete listing of all subjects 8 INTRODUCTION EE VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is located on a stamped plate on the bottom of the left front A Pillar visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind shield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Lab
24. and propeller shafts Interior Fuses The fuse panel is on the left side of the instrument panel A label is attached to the fuse panel cover to identify each fuse for ease of replacement CAUTION Under frequent heavy duty driving conditions change all lubricants and lubricate body compo nents all driveline joints and steering linkage more often than in normal service to prevent excessive wear Fuse Panel EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Cavity Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Description 1 15 Amp Blue Horn Relay Power Sunroof 11 15 Amp Blue Flasher Relay Power Window Relay 12 15 Amp Blue Stop Lights 10 Amp Red Rear Fog Lights Export 13 10 Amp Red Body Control Module Only CMTC Cluster Pass Airbag 3 20 Amp Yel Cigar Lighter On Off Indicator Auto Day low light Mirror Light Bar 4 10 Amp Red Headlight Low Beam Right Switch Renegade Only 5 10 Amp Red Headlight Low Beam Left 14 10 Amp Red PDC Fuel Pump AC Clutch 6 20 Amp Yel Body Control Module Power ou a E low Door Locks Controller Diesel Only 7 10 Amp Red Left Park Light Left Tail 15 S Lamp License Plate Lamp pete 8 Spare 16 pw Yel Power Outlet Rear 9 10 Amp Red Right Park Light RightTail 7 Lamp License Plate Lamp 17 15 Amp Blue Rear Wiper Cluster 18 20 Amp Yel Radio Choke amp Relay low 10 Spare 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M
25. be injured Children should be warned not to touch 100 the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector lever Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock Ignition Key Release Button all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is fully inserted in the ignition switch a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The Sentry Key Immobilizer System SKIS prevents unauthorized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine The system will shut the engine down after 2 seconds of running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle This system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic chip transponder embedded into them Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle for longer than the 2 second validation time period The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be armed or activated Operation of the system is automatic regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or unlocked During normal operation the Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator Light located in the instru ment cluster will come on for 3 sec
26. can become a missile inside the vehicle The children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law force required to hold even an infant on your lap can and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Infants and Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn babies at the right front passenger seat position If a car bed must be used to transport a newborn baby the car bed must be installed in the second seating row only Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing
27. e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or clamps damage e Inspect manual transmission fluid level and for leaks if equipped e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e After completion of off road operation the underside of the vehicle should be thoroughly inspected Exam ine threaded fasteners for looseness M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Check the fluid levels of the engine coolant anti freeze reservoir brake master cylinder and transmis sion and add as needed ee SCHEDULE B GASOLINE ENGINES 363 Schedule B Gasoline Engines Follow schedule B if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert driving e If equipped for and operated with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then flush a
28. infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 e Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who WARNING are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible e Improper installation can lead to failure of an child seats used in the forward facing direction are for infant or child restraint It could come loose in a children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and are collision The child could be badly injured or older than one year old These child seats are also held killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt actly when installing an infant or child restraint e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh A rearward facing infan
29. remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Sentry Key Security Alarm Indica tor Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound The Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on for 3 seconds then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed Repeat this process to program up to a total of 8 keys General Information The Sentry Key Immobilizer System complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock manual transmission only This lock pre vents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel With the engine running rotate the steering wheel 1
30. required however the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on Also a chime will sound if the light comes back on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes The operation of the ABS light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 10 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on for three seconds when the ignition is first turned ON If the light comes back on immediately or comes on while driving it means that there is a problem with the charging system or the battery is low Also a chime will sound if the light comes back on See your authorized dealer immediately es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 11 Temperature Gage E Indicates engine coolant temperature Any read ing within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gage pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature above center scale when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy stop and go traffic or
31. when the operating temperature is corrected or another MODE is selected An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons e Excessive vibration Disc inserted upside down e Damaged disc e Water condensation on optics es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 SALES CODE RBK AM FM STEREO RADIO Radio Operation WITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER Power Volume Control CONTROLS Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio on Turn the NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower left volume control clockwise to increase the volume pide QE younandia faceplate NOTE Power to operate the radio is supplied through the ignition switch It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Q a HO D Seek D mo BY Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next am QE 3 station in either the AM or FM mode Press the top of the button to seek up or the bottom to seek down The radio PUR EU wel E will remain tuned to the new station until you make T og v c another selection Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you release it 813ebac3 RBK Radio 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Tune Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency If you press and hold the button the radio will
32. your hand held transmitter button until the radio signal has success fully been accepted by HomeLink The message TRAINED will appear on the HomeLink display Proceed with the remaining steps under Programming HomeLink to complete Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The sunroof control is located on the headliner between the sun visors 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press and hold the switch rearward to fully open the sunroof The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full open Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature causing the sunroof to open automatically Power Sunroof Switch 810aa974 Power Sunroof Switch Press and hold the V button in the center of the sunroof switch to open the vent The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full vent To close the sunroof from the vent position press and hold the switch forward Releasing the switch will stop the movement of
33. 2 revolution from straight ahead position turn off the engine and remove the key Rotate the steering wheel slightly in both directions until the lock engages To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off unless the dome inhibit feature was selected on the multi function control lever Refer to LIGHTS in Section 3 of this manual The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se DOORS AND DOOR LOCKS The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word door as an indication of a door ajar or door not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely closed the VF display will show the word door and then show the odometer trip odometer mileage each for 2 seconds The display will continue to cycle NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Cent
34. 251 Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave ef fects Maximum speed in 20 inches of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami nated Contaminated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent component damage Driving In Snow Mud and Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO Use first gear and 4L or 4LO for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes R
35. 316 Finish Care es cime euadere eus 338 Flashers Hazard Warning llsllllle tiri 292 Tum Signal ss e RR carias 168 352 355 Flooded Engine Starting 222 Fluid Capacities 05400 iced ew tad oa ean 356 Ehud Leaks ur feces Boats bu haa Sune 75 Fluid Level Checks tre 0 000 eee ene 75 Automatic Transmission 333 C l t EIU ausu tese Ec aoe en eon id 335 Engine OU xs big turre t kerani eb esee 312 Manual Transmission 335 l ower Steering xara sone ER ER kaikas 322 Fog Light Service i 2e RR RR 353 Fog Liglits 45d ete EE Se 120 353 Folding Rear Seat eane miea ie eese 113 Four Wheel Drive lees 236 Operation 4 4 es eS HA PS ERREUR DERE E 236 Shif ng sve sede e ER er na 239 243 SYSTEMS ais chsh ae eR HARE ER TRAN 236 240 Four Way Hazard Flasher 292 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 04 236 Front Axle 3a pe RR FOR aede 337 Fuel usua oce eRe AME OE PS ONSE AS Ys 276 280 Diesel id uds Eu eder ES E du E aus 280 Filler Canons Lose acri deco ree dante oa paie dente aoe 281 Filler Door krent 233306 dE Reed oe DRE 281 Gasolin amp iusso b ede X RR RUE HUP UR MR 276 Gage i eet ae GSS Het bacs d OPER d necs 174 Materials Added 0 0 0 0 ee eee ae 279 Octane Rating 406 INDEX aa Requirements iie haac acis 276 280 356 Tank Capacity repressi RR S ne Res 356 Fuel System Caution llle 279 283 FUSES o
36. 4 FULL TIME position and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting The 4LO MODE indicator light located on the instru while only the front or rear wheels are spinning ment cluster illuminates when the transfer case is shifted can cause damage to the transfer case to the 4LO position There is no light for the 2WD or N Neutral positions When operating your vehicle in 4LO the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD 4 PART TIME or 4 FULL TIME positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h 242 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the transfer case WARNING e Because 4 wheel drive provides improved trac tion there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road con ditions permit You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case Neutral N position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the dri
37. 7 57L of diesel fuel to m the fuel tank 2 Open the hood 226 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 3 Depress the fuel water separator knob 20 consecutive times Hand Prime Pump 4 Turn the ignition to START and crank the engine a maximum of 10 seconds If the engine does not start repeat Step 3 NOTE The engine will typically start within 10 sec onds the engine will idle then stall purging air from the fuel lines and filter 5 Depress the fuel water separator knob 20 consecutive times 6 Turn the ignition to START and crank the engine a maximum of 10 seconds The engine should start and remain running NOTE If the engine does not start repeat the cycle as many times as necessary ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is found under the hood clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine 3 7L only EE STARTING AND OPERATING 227 WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days TRANSMISSION SHIFTING 6 Speed Manual Transmission Follow the shift pattern on the gearshift knob Manual Shift Controls
38. 73 Restraint Systems SRS Airbags 48 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Child Restraint 000000000 63 The Vehicle saaniga ama dte oer OR eee es H Engine Break In Recommendations 73 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Mi Safety Tips 6 cscs ive Rr RR n ERR 73 NI aa pataa a nae LUA dette igit is 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with the key code number on it If you received your keys without the bag ask your dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by the dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Insert the key fully then turn the switch to one of the four illustrated positions The key can be inserted or with drawn only in the LOCK position The automatic trans mission gear selector must be in the P Park position To remove the ignition key on models with an automatic transmission place the gearshift lever in P Park tum the ignition key to LOCK and remove the key Ignition Key Positions en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 To remove the ignition key on models with a manual WARNING transmission depress and hold the key release button turn the ignition key to LOCK and remove the key Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could
39. A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 gt x lt gt x lt M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 368 SCHEDULE B GASOLINE ENGINES ME Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Miles 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 75 000 Kilometers 101 000 106 000 110 000 115 000 120 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if belt was previously replaced X E SCHEDULE B GASOLINE ENGINES 369 Miles 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 125 000 130000 134 000 139 000 144 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Replace the spark plugs X Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary gt X Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not X required if belt was previously replaced Replace the timing belt 2 4L Only o X Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X M A l N T
40. Anchors 67 68 Child Safety LOCKS 53 cea dore acier e 24 Climate Control 9e rekist Ae E hs 212 Clock 176 Clutch Interlocking Ignition System 220 229 Command Trac Operation s s sacres nars anst 236 Compact Disc Maintenance 211 Compact Disc Player 205 178 184 COMPASS erer eiss crescesse iseis FRE 137 Compass Calibration lt ire prsa kessang 137 Compass Variance seade he a a E eee 138 Computer Trip Travel 00 135 Console Overhead llle 129 Contract Service isep aun daai 392 Converter Catalytic ocres srir reski eee 317 Cool Down Turbo 0 0 00 ee erhi 224 Cooling System cvcse ke nese nea ee ees 325 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 327 Coolant Capacity eceran anenee a 356 Coolant Level 4 uses hm ER as 328 Disposal of Used Coolant 328 Drain Flush and Refill 326 INSPECHON ssa e ARR Se HOO Rond RR 325 Points to Remember 050 329 Pressure Cap aaa es sedere e Sareea sod 327 Radiator Cap i24 ure Rd E Pep 327 en INDEX 403 Selection of Coolant ills 326 356 Temperature Gauge 2c s a 171 Crankcase Emission Control System 319 Cruise Control Speed Control 127 Cruise Light ii 9 x Rn a 172 Cup Holdef 222c 9 RR Re RES 150 Customer Assistance llle 390 Cylinder Retest Requirements
41. Emission Warranty p California Emission Warranty a eee eee Specified Components NOTE Vehicles used as a police vehicle taxi limousine postal delivery vehicle ambulance or rental vehicle are covered only under the 3 year 36 000 mile Basic Limited Warranty 8132c269 U S ONLY E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 395 MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in Wash ington DC area or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Cus
42. Exhaust gas can cause se rious injury or death WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming HomeLink Do not program HomeLink if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects 1 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 5 14 cm away from the lower left corner of the EVIC display while keeping the display in view NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace the next step with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the desired HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button After a short time the message TRAINING will show on HomeLink display Do not release the buttons until the next step has been completed BUTTONS HomeLink Buttons 810aa849 3 When the message TRAINED appears on the HomeLink display release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons NOTE If the HomeLink display does not change to TRAINED contact HomeLink at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 for assistance 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button TRANSMIT should appear on the display If your device activates when the HomeLink button is depressed and released programming is complete N
43. High Range Locks the front and rear driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only N Neutral Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Sec tion 5 for more information EN STARTING AND OPERATING 239 4L 4 Wheel Drive Low Range Low speed 4 wheel drive Locks the front and rear driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Allows engine starting without depressing the clutch pedal on vehicles equipped with manual transmission Refer to Starting Procedures Manual Transmission 4WD Models Only in this section Shifting Procedure 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle in motion up to 55 mph 88 km h The transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission to N Neutral or depress the clutch on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the tra
44. Inspect the transfer case fluid X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 376 SCHEDULE A GASOLINE ENGINES ME Miles 84 000 90 000 96 000 102 000 Kilometers 134 000 144 000 154 000 163 000 Months 84 90 96 102 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate the tires X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element and replace if nec X essary Replace the spark plugs X Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required X X if previously replaced Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if not X done at 60 months Inspect the transfer case fluid X n SCHEDULE A GASOLINE ENGINES 377 H Miles 108 000 114 000 120 000 R Kilometers 173 000 182 000 192 000 T Months 108 114 120 E Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X A Rotate the tires X X X N Inspect the engine air filter element and replace if necessary X E Replace the spark plugs X Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary X Inspect the ignition cables and replace if necessary 2 4L Only X H Inspect the brake linings X E Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if pre X X 1 viously replaced L Flush and r
45. Keyless Entry RKE there will not be a door lock cylinder on the front passenger door rear doors or rear swing gate Therefore you will be unable to disarm the system with a manual unlock of the passenger or rear doors The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter once the system is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the Unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to disarm the system You may also acciden tally disarm the system by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm REAR SWING GATE The swing gate can be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors WARNING To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass will automatically rise 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING To open the swing gate pull the gate handle to its first detent to open just the flip up window Pull the handle to its second detent all the way to open both the flip up window and swing gate 80d1f443 Swing Gate Release To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass will automatically rise The vacuum fluorescent
46. Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s lj performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposing of Used Engine Oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or gov ernmental agency for advice on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension At the mileage shown in the appropriate Maintenance Schedule check all drive belts for condition and proper tension Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Inspect the drive belt for evidence of cuts cracks or glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage which could result in belt
47. N Neutral NOTE To shift from 4 FULL TIME to 4LO the shift lever should be pushed away from the driver and then rearward into 4LO In 4 FULL TIME there is a neutral stop to prevent shifting into N Neutral by accident NOTE Pausing in transfer case N Neutral in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift If difficulty occurs shift transmis sion to N Neutral hold foot on brake and turn engine OFF Make shift to desired mode NOTE Shifting into or out of 4LO is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may oc cur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The pre ferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4LO with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h EN STARTING AND OPERATING 245 TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED The optional Trac Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel If traction differs between the two rear wheels the differ ential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction Trac Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions Wit
48. OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update
49. P or accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the shift lever between these gears vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift interlock system BTSI which holds the gearshift lever in the P Park position when the ignition switch is in the OFF position To move the gear selector lever out of the P Park position turn the ignition switch to the ON position and press the brake pedal and the button on the front of the shifter handle Automatic Shift Controls E STARTING AND OPERATING 231 Gear Ranges WARNING P Park Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis sion The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always place the gear selector in the P Park position first and then apply the parking brake Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the eng
50. RR 119 168 352 355 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 168 Loading Vehicle TIES ic3caoxcc eed xy ee bea ea 258 Locks Automatic Door llle 23 Child Protection rer Rd rs 24 DOOR uude pec oe eu e aoe de S 20 Power DOO setes unera caa ode oe eee Ow 23 Steering Wheel osczo dur s ohh Bue h a ate es 19 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH ze ERIGI ES RR XE 67 68 Lubrication Body isse aen es 323 Luggage Carrier 2229622 m RES 159 L ggage Rack ste eat cates am oe ADR ks 159 Maintenance Free Battery 05 320 Maintenance Procedures 00005 312 Maintenance Schedule Diesel Light Duty Schedule A Light Duty Schedule B 363 380 Schedule A 20 ee 373 385 Schedule B o oaea painea ee 363 380 Maintenance Sunroof 0 0002 eee 147 Malfunction Indicator Light 169 310 Manual Service llle Manual Transmission Fluid Level Check 0 00000 0005 Lubricant Selection Shift Speeds wai tiene bm Eee Rees Map Reading Lights Master Cylinder i aes diios heres he tees Mini Trip Computer 0000000 MILFEOES 3 3 data Romo e i a Erb apu XR Ped penso Automatic Dimming Electric Remote 410 INDEX EE Heated 226A pee Rr EROR Rd 84 Outside ses oes bue d weno oe mde Pis 82 Rearview aca RE ER ee weak oe YU 81 Vanity cse ses oe p oe ee d de cates 84 Modifications Alterations Vehicle
51. SEEK to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade Time Button Press the TIME button to change the display between radio frequency and time 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME General Information This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion NOTE Changes or modifications not expressively ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CD Player Operation NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the Power Volume control pushed ON before the CD player will operate Inserting The Compact Disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the display will show the time of day If you insert a disc with the ig
52. STARTING AND OPERATING 285 CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident e Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are mandatory for motoring safety Follow the maintenance intervals in schedule B for changing the automatic transmission fluid and filter if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation 286 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Gross T GCWR T Trailer Type Trailer Weight Max Engine rans Cooling Weight eig See Note 1 mission Fold Down and Low Profile 300 Ibs 4x2 25 ft 2 3m 136 kg 6 750 lbs or Less Frontal Area 2 000 Ibs Max 3 062 kg 907 kg Up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Max 10to 4x4 also Small Boats 1596 of 7 000 Ibs Flatbed Trailers etc GTW 3 175 kg Fold Down and Low Profile 300 Ibs 4x2 25 ft 2 3m 136 kg 7 100 Ibs or Less Frontal Area 2 000 Ibs Max 3 220 kg 907 kg s Automatic Up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Max 10 to 4x4 also Small Boats 1
53. Se in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your co
54. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel And Interior Controls 165 Mi Instrument Cluster 00000000 166 24L 37L Engines 6 0 0 000 000 000 166 2 8L Diesel Engines llle 167 B Instrument Cluster Description 168 Bl Electronic Digital Clock 04 176 Clock Setting Procedure 176 Bl Radio General Information 177 Radio Broadcast Signals 177 Two Types Of Signals Electrical Disturbances AM Reception FM Reception a eio pititari Pel 177 lll Sales Code RAZ AM FM Stereo Radio With Cassette Tape Player CD Player And CD Changer ContfolSs S 12 04 cx ry ene pte s 178 Operating Instructions Radio 178 Power Switch Volume Control 178 Seek Button Radio Mode 178 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Turing sas xau cioe eder RR e a b Uds 179 Rewind RW 4 4 24st sare aes Rer tamt 183 Radio Data System RDS 179 Tape Eject ss a pes enews cae ois ar 183 PTY Program Type Button 179 Scan Button usa es daai a RE Sg ed 183 Balance exotic ed E IR IERI ape p 181 Changing Tape Di
55. VF display located in the odometer area displays the words GATE and or GLASS as an indication of when the swing gate and or flip up window is not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the swing gate and or flip up window is not completely closed the VF display will show the word GATE and or GLASS and then show the odometer trip odometer mileage each for 2 sec onds The display will continue to cycle NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the overhead console all warnings including door GATE GLASS and LOWASH will only be displayed in the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 EVIC display not in the instrument cluster For addi tional information refer to Overhead Console If Equipped in Section 3 Gate Open Display Glass Open Display If any other active warnings including door or LO WASH are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving two single chimes will occur if the rear glass is open or three single chimes will occur if the rear swing gate is 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se open one chime for each complete display cycle After this the VF display will continue to sequence only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only
56. YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection twice to move 2 selections etc Fast Forward FF Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape in the direction that it is playing The tape will advance until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Rewind RW Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape direction The tape will reverse until the button is pressed again or until the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Tape Eject Press the EJT Tape button and the cassette will disengage and eject from the radio Scan Button Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature Changing Tape Direction If you wish to change the direction of tape travel side being played press the PTY button The lighted arrow in the display window will show the new direction Metal Tape Selection If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player the player will automatically select the correct equalization and the 70 symbol will appear in the display window 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Pinch Roller Release If ignition power or the radio ON OFF switch are turn
57. and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconsc
58. and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system The diagram below shows the mirror with the appropriate buttons Individual button behavior is discussed in the Operation section 8105b20d UConnect Switches The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone If your
59. bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 4 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 Front Fog Light Front Fascia Mounted 1 Remove the three screws from the backside of the lamp housing m 8158e9d6 2 Pull the bezel and lens away from the lamp housing far enough to access and disconnect the wiring connector from the bulb pigtail wire 3 Pinch together the two hooked ends of the bulb retainer clip and disengage them from the slots in the mounting flange on the back of the lens reflector 4 Pivot the retainer clip up off of the bulb flange and out of the way CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 5 Pull the bulb straight out of the mounting flange and replace the bulb 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Light Bar 3 Disconnect wiring harness from bulb socket 1 Remove the screws from the light bar cover 4 Rotate the socket on the back of the lamp housing counter clockwise to unlock it CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbin
60. cellular phone supports a different profile eg Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can either be adjusted from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the voice on beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each of the feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can ei
61. collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac turer s instructions for cleaning 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front pass
62. displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage NOTE Close swing gate before flip up window CAUTION Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing swing gate as damage to the blade will result WARNING Driving with the flip up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flip up window closed when you are operating the vehicle NOTE The rear swing gate will lock while the rear wiper is operating The gate will stay locked until the wiper is turned off and the gate is unlocked by key lock switch or key fob NOTE The swing gate will lock automatically when the vehicle begins moving ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped The power window switches are located on the center floor console The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window The switches will continue to function for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key has been removed or until a door is opened Power Window Switches The window lock switch located next to the window switches allows you to disable the rear passenger win dow switches that are located on the back of the center floor console 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFOR
63. equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill At the intervals shown on the appropriate Maintenance Schedule the system should be drained flushed and refilled If the coolant solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner see your authorized dealer for recommendations Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze coolant solution Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended antifreeze coolant refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct antifreeze coolant type CAUTION e Mixing of antifreeze coolant other than the speci fied HOAT antifreeze coolant may result in de creased corrosion protection and engine damage If a non HOAT antifreeze coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified antifreeze coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or
64. es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the switch is pushed forward again Express Open Feature During the Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position Again momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature To close the sunroof hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed forward again The sunroof is not completely closed until the rear of the sunroof glass moves upward at the end of it s travel The sunshade can be opened manually It will also open as the sunroof opens The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open WARNING e In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER OUTLET There is a
65. es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK External racks do not increase the total load carrying CAUTION capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity luggage rack do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity as of 150 Ibs 68 kg or 65 Ibs 29 5 kg on Renegade shown on the label attached to the drivers door shut face models Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is espe cially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in personal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack
66. for all four active road tires and the spare tire The spare tire pressure is monitored but not displayed NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp will T4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indi cator Lamp will flash on and off for ten seconds when a es STARTING AND OPERATING 271 system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset The Tire Pressure Monitoring System consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 5 Wheel Sensors e 4 Wheel Sensor Trigger Modules Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display Messages in the EVIC e Amber Colored Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp The system consists of tire pressure monitoring sensors attached to each wheel through the valve stem mounting hole a central receiver module Wheel Sensor Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display Mes sages in the EVIC and an amber colored Indicator Lamp A sensor shall be installed in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly NOTE For vehicles with optional wheel tire sizes and sign
67. light will turn on when there is a low tire l pressure condition The light will also turn on if a problem exist with any tire sensor The light will remain on until the tire pressure is prop erly set or the problem with the sensor is corrected This light will turn on momentarily as a bulb check when the engine is started When the Tire Pressure Monitor Warning Light is lit one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle s tire information placard Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Each tire including the spare should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified on the vehicle placard See page 268 for more information 6 4LO Mode Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in 4 Lo the 4 LO four wheel drive mode The front and MODE tear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed See page 236 for more infor mation 7 Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INS
68. not engaged This is a normal condition e If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This is considered a 236 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between normal condition and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within 5 seconds of shifting from P Park into any other gear position Rocking the Vehicle If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the gear selector rhythmically between First and R Reverse while applying slight pressure to the accelerator The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Racing the engine or spinning the wheels due to the frustration of not freeing the vehicle may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the engine to idle with the transmission selector in N Neutral for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheat ing and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle First and R Reverse do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or d
69. not in use 3 Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight heat and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers 4 Before inserting a tape make sure that the label is adhering flat to the cassette 5 Aloose tape should be corrected before use To rewind a loose tape insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions Maintain your cassette tape player The head and capstan shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape deposits each time a cassette is played The result of deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap around and become lodged in the tape transport The other adverse condition is low or muddy sound from one or both channels as if the treble tone control were turned all the way down To prevent this you should periodically clean the head with a commercially available WET cleaning cassette ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 As preventive maintenance clean the head about every 30 hours of use If you wait until the head becomes very dirty noticeably poor sound it may not be possible to remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper pap
70. of properly seated adults the passen ger frontal airbag will be enabled in the event of a collision For small teenagers and some small adults depending on size the airbag may or may not be enabled in the event of a collision Both drivers and passengers ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 should always use the PAD indicator light as an indica tion if the front passenger is properly positioned or not If the PAD indicator light comes on when an adult is in the passenger seat have the passenger re position them selves in the seat until the light goes out Remember if the PAD indicator light is illuminated the passenger front airbag will not inflate For properly installed child re straint systems and children properly seated on the front passenger seat the airbag will be disabled If at all possible place children 12 years and younger in a back seat e The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into one of three size categories based on the input from the Bladder Assembly and a Belt Tension Sensor The size categories include empty child and adult The OCM sends the Occupant Clas sification to the ORC to determine if a front passenger airbag is allowed If a fault is present the AIRBAG warning light is illuminated The Passenger Airbag Disabled PAD Indicator Light indicates to the driver and passenger when the airbag is turned OFF
71. of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre set stations you may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button if equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 NOT
72. of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions But even in collisions where the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint See Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has window bags do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Custome
73. oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate the tires X X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element and replace X if necessary Replace the spark plugs X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the transfer case fluid X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 374 SCHEDULE A GASOLINE ENGINES ME Miles 36 000 42 000 48 000 54 000 Kilometers 58 000 67 000 77 000 86 000 Months 36 42 48 54 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate the tires X X X X Inspect the brake linings X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 E SCHEDULE A GASOLINE ENGINES 375 H Miles 60 000 66 000 72 000 78 000 Kilometers 96 000 106000 15000 125000 Months 60 66 72 78 N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X 4 Rotate the tires X X X X C Inspect the engine air filter element and replace if nec X E essary S Replace the spark plugs X C Inspect the ignition cables and replace if necessary X B 2 4L Only D Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary X U Inspect the brake linings X E Inspect the drive belt and replace if needed X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not re X 8 quired if previously replaced Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze at 60 X months if not done at 102 000 miles 163 000 km
74. once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar Cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid auto matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh Wf brushes that may damage the wheel s protective fin ish If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Interior Care Use Mo
75. problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the P Park position The light should turn 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is re quired and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 30 Glow Plug Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the ignition 00 switch is first turned to the ON position Wait until the light turns off before starting the vehicle Refer to Starting Procedures in Sec tion 5 of this manual See page 220 for more information ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the time in hours and minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position and the time button is pressed When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed time
76. provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Siritus Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME System Activation To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following informa tion available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RBB RAH and RBK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the Tape Eject or CD Bject depend ing on the radio type and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will be displayed Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits have been displayed The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits are displayed The r
77. rear power outlet located in the right rear cargo To the right of the convenience tray lower center of area above the storage cargo net CD changer if instrument panel is an outlet for electrically powered equipped accessories Pull lightly on the top of the plastic cover to open the outlet Rear Power Outlet Front Power Outlet N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 The rear power outlet is a direct feed from the battery so 1 it receives power whether the ignition is in the ON or CALTON OFF position Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off All accessories connected to this outlet should be re e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw moved or turned off when the vehicle is not in use power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CUP HOLDERS Smo
78. rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to you selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 391 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e f your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills
79. require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 31
80. sii aa dae ee X ERA 301 Emission Control System Maintenance 310 360 Engine Air Cleaner 21 3 e 3e c EA REY 319 Block Heater i12 seu nev y Ges eas 226 Break In Recommendations 73 Checking Oil Lev l ss dre er 312 Compartment 0000000000 306 307 Compartment Identification 306 307 Cooling is ditt eG rax Ced ew Yer edo 325 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 000000 ee 280 Fails to Stait 22 ue TIRE PI Pe Ses 222 Flooded Starting cec reae gals eee 222 Fuel Requirements 276 356 Jump Starting e eG re ERR ee 299 Malfunction Indicator llle 169 Qil Soi dose 940 09 sna he eke Rees 312 356 Oil Change Interval lees 313 Oil Disposal 5er hr eR xata 316 Oil Filtet ius cues RR EIER ERU ac 316 Oil Filter Disposal 0 0 0000 316 Oil Selection esi heden inih a a 314 315 356 Oil Synthetic cna ccs e re ke en 315 Overheating auria acetone YE acd eg durs begun 293 Iris POLT 220 Temperature Gauge 0 0 eee eee 171 Timing Belt 22e Rer ER pes 319 Engine Oil Viscosity sesar as ssaa saas 314 315 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 314 315 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 61 Entry System Illuminated 19 en INDEX 405 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 0005 73 280 Exhaust Systeme i 4 3e E REEL e040 324 Exterior Finish Care llle 338 Filters Air Cleaner i222 e ex ITYGE 319 Engine Oll i E e eR
81. that have the optional Electronic with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to Vehicle Information Center EVIC VIG folowing IWO candoris The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a 1 This device may not cause harmful interference convenient way to replace up to three hand held radio E frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators garage door openers entry door locks security systems even home lighting Additional HomeLink information can be found at www homelink com or by calling 1 800 355 3515 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate this equipment 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate operator make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside of the garage Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse fea tures as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manu factured before April 1 1982 A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the d
82. third time and BAL will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Selection Press the AM FM button to change from AM to FM The operating mode will be displayed next to the station frequency The display will show ST when a stereo station is received Time Press the TIME button to change the display between radio frequency and time General Information This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion NOTE Changes or modifications not expressively ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CD Player Operation NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the volume control ON before the CD player will operate 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Inserting The Compact Disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs ma
83. tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary damage that results in tire failure areas are affected by improper tire pressure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle e Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Always drive with each tire properly inflated en STARTING AND OPERATING 263 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicl
84. to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Scan Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME FF TUNE RW Press FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner Random Play SET RND Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the tracks on the disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Random Play PTY Program Type Button Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button repeatedly within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types Program Type Radio Display Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Emergency ALERT Emergency Test Test Information Inform Jazz Jazz Foreign Language Language News News
85. to the vehicle electronics Important Note About Service A four digit PIN number is needed to service the Sentry Key Immobilizer System This number can be obtained from your authorized dealer However this number can also be found on your customer invoice that you were given upon receipt of your vehicle Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key System serviced bring all vehicle keys to the dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid keys by doing the following 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and
86. will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call pres
87. you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute off Information Service When using AT amp T Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired c
88. your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle E SCHEDULE A GASOLINE ENGINES 379 At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent add as required Once a Month e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of engine coolant anti freeze deaeration bottle brake master cylinder and transmis sion and add as needed At Each Oil Change Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation Change the engine oil filter Inspect the exhaust system Inspect brake hoses Check the engine coolant anti freeze level hoses and clamps Inspect engine accessory drive belts Replace as neces sary Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel filter water separator unit M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Tire Rotation Rotate the tires every 6 000 miles 10 000 km M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8
89. 1 or 1991 258 STARTING AND OPERATING EENEEEEEEEEEEMEMMMMMMEEEEEEM NN Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure for pas senger cars is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar For vehicles other than passenger cars the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either the shutface of the driver s door the B pillar the Certification Label or in the Tire Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment 811ad0d0 Tire Placard Location STARTING AND OPERATING 259 Tire and Loading Information Placard Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you NEVER EXCEED XXX KG fete adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire TIRE Ri inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE Heat 3 Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of i this manual SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on Tire and Loading Information 81155090 GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing see the Vehicle Loading secti
90. 27 Automatic Transmission 230 Manual Transmission s s 227 Transfer Case 2 ee ee 239 243 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 43 Shoulder Bells x 5 4331 shane CR TR CR Signals TUN 2 e ke e Ren Snow Chains Tire Chains 414 INDEX EE SHOW PLOW ik ensis inde eb shes rte aen eet nts 289 Spare Tite ied han dew d ha p btee ps 295 Spark Plugs i a athens x debeo SR ER ree 317 Specifications puel os So pag nen ere x RR 276 S MT 314 315 Speed Control seuen espe meon een 127 Speedometer osis itar eme dm RR RR 168 STATUINE ce bec aches hs Recs SM Ue Un pes 220 Automatic Transmission llus 220 Emergency Jump Starting 299 Engine Block Heater 00 226 Engine Fails to Start 2 6 6 64 bay eben 222 Manual Transmission sells 220 Starting Procedures sssi erasida ee eens 220 Steering POWGE eios eer aeaa Seba RUE een ee 322 Wheel Lock ere ae waived ERE EN 19 Wheel Tilt 2nd e PGS ae 126 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls ov sesepi ere eka PDE SE RP 208 OLOTdgB a xe s ace RR RE RU A X Re ew SN a 349 Storage Vehicle ss gira iene koe e e E 349 Storing Your Vehicle llle 349 Sun Roof cl emere eRe eee ea ed beers 145 Sun Visor Extension 000000004 84 Sunroof Maintenance 0000 147 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 48 Swing Gate Rear 1 6 ee 31 System Navigat
91. 5 of 7 400 Ibs Flatbed Trailers etc GTW 3 357 kg Up to 3 500 Ibs 1588 kg GTW 4x2 7 100 Ibs Single axle small to 3 500 Ibs 525 Ibs 3 220 kg medium length 1 588 kg 238 kg 4x4 Max Max 8 750 lbs 3 969 kg Other Trailer Types and Weights 4x2 Up to Full Box Shape 9 800 Ibs Up to 64 ft 5 8m 4 445 kg Frontal Area Maximum trailer length 18 ft 5 5m 5 000 Ibs 750 Ibs 4x4 Up to 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 340 kg 10 100 Ibs 2 268 kg GTW Max Max 4 581 kg Maximum Travel 4x4 28L Trailer Length 10 150 Ibs Di i l Automatic 25 ft 7 6m 4 604 kg iesel 1 GCWR Total combined weight of trailer and tow vehicle 8150c3e4 Minimum Vehicle Requirements for Trailer Towing EN STARTING AND OPERATING 287 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing 2WD Models Recreational towing is not allowed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground can result in severe transmis sion damage Towing 4WD Models CAUTION Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing NOTE The transfer case must be shifted into N Neu tral and the transmission must be shifted into P Park for automatic transmission or into any forward gear for manual transmission for recreational towing Shifting Into Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle f
92. 9 Engine Timing Belt 2 4L Engine Replace the engine timing belt at the intervals described in the appropriate maintenance schedule Ignition Wiring System 2 4L Engine Replace the ignition cables at the intervals described in the appropriate maintenance schedule Crankcase Emission Control System Proper operation of this system depends on freedom from sticking or plugging due to deposits As vehicle mileage builds up the PCV valve and passages may accumulate deposits If a valve is not working properly replace it with a new valve DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or plugging deposits Replace if necessary Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Maintenance Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Maintenance Schedule B WARNING The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless it is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compart ment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a ma
93. ARNING Do not coast in N Neutral and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 233 Overdrive O D For most city and highway driving The transmission contains an electronically controlled Overdrive and will automatically shift from D Drive to O D Overdrive if the following conditions are present e The transmission selector is in D Drive e The O D OFF button has not been activated e Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e Transmission has reached normal operating tempera ture When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using Overdrive such as when operating the vehicle under heavy load conditions for example in hilly terrain strong head winds or trailer towing turning off over drive will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup O D Off Button Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O D OFF button located on side of the gearshift lever The O D OFF indicator light will illuminate to show that the switch has been activated When the indicator light is on Overdrive is locked out Pressing the switch a second time restores the Overdrive function The lockout feature is useful when towing a trailer or carrying a heavy load 234 STARTING AND OPERATING ME
94. Coolant Anti Lock Brake System ABS 247 Anti Lock Warning Light 170 Appearance Care c vaca es aa oe A es 337 Arming Theft System ertas serani we eea E 30 Auto Down Power Windows sss 36 Automatic Dimming Mirror 82 Automatic Door Locks ills 23 Automatic Transmission 0 230 333 Adding Fluid 0000000 335 Fluid and Filter Changes 333 Fluid Level Check i 22er evans 334 Fluid Type oni cobs Gee rau tes da eges 333 Gear Ranges s xe HEY dex e Ee bs 231 SNINE iu ux edere eie is i ASAE erige eno 230 Special Additives scssi icd ode AE metis 335 Torque Converter ue ase wine ae apenas 235 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 0 148 Auxiliary Power Outlet llle 148 en INDEX 401 Bap LIENE so bgeus eb gna ong alls ER Es 121 354 Battery 4s heb eid edie Y er ER 320 Emergency Starting 0 0 0 0 eee eee 299 Keyless Transmitter Replacement 29 Saving Feature Protection 120 Belts Drive 0 0 0 eee 316 Body Mechanism Lubrication 323 B Pillar Location 0 0 00 ee eee 258 Brake Syste 502 son bbe oe See Pea ERES P 330 Anti Lock 2 0 0 00 ee eee 170 247 HoOS S 24e REESE SETA 331 Master Cylinder llle ess 332 Parking i e oS 4 eS ER ee ERLe RE 245 Warning Light arent ey 173 Brake Transmission Interlock 230 Break In R
95. E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 370 SCHEDULE B GASOLINE ENGINES ME Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluidt X Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 102 000 105 000 Kilometers 149 000 154000 158 000 163 000 168 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if belt was previously replaced X Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if not done at 60 months E SCHEDULE B GASOLINE ENGINES 371 M A Miles 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 7 Kilometers 173 000 178 000 182 000 187 000 192 000 B Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not replaced at X X X X X N 3 months A Rotate the tires X X X i Inspect the engine air filter element replace if necessary X E Replace the spark plugs X S Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary X C Replace the ignition cables 2 4L Only X B Inspect the brake linings X X D Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluidt X X U Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid and replace X E main sump filter t 3
96. E Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes zu e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches TEERING WHEEL The right hand c
97. E S 8 366 SCHEDULE B GASOLINE ENGINES ME Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluidt X Miles 33 000 36 000 39 000 42 000 45 000 Kilometers 53 000 58 000 62 000 67 000 72 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed X E SCHEDULE B GASOLINE ENGINES 367 Miles 48 000 51 000 54 000 57 000 60 000 Kilometers 77 000 82 000 86 000 91 000 96 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not replaced at X X X X X 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary Replace the ignition cables 2 4L Only Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluidt X mK gt lt lt lt lt gt lt lt gt lt Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid and replace main sump filter t Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if belt was previously Drain and refill the transfer case fluid Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze at 60 X months if not done at 102 000 miles 163 000 km M A l N T E N
98. E STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Auto Down Feature If Equipped The driver s and passenger s front window switches have an auto down feature Press the window switch past the detent release and the window will go down auto matically To open the window part way press the window switch part way and release it when you want the window to stop Rear Passenger Window Switches The rear passenger window switches are located on the back of the center floor console 2 2 o 9 A 81589815 Rear Power Window Switches Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if equipped window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems
99. ERATING 229 e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting between a forward gear and reverse do not spin wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Recommended Manual Transmission Shifting Speeds The manufacturer recommends that you use the shift speeds listed in the chart below Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H En speeds 1 to 2 2to3 3to4 4to5 5 to6 gme 24 34 46 57 24L Acel 1403 Ga Gm 74 92 1 2 33 45 Cruise 11 18 31 43 61 72 37L Accel BA 24 34 47 56 39 55 76 90 Cruise 1009 19 27 37 41 31 43 60 66 Clutch Interlocking Ignition System 2WD Models Only Manual transmission vehicles are equipped with a clutch interlock safety feature The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to allow cranking of the engine 4WD Models Only The exception to this clutch inter lock is 4WD models equipped with a manual transmis sion For these models the clutch interlock feature is overridden when the vehicle is operated in 4L to enhance off road capability Refer to Starting Procedures Manual Transmission AWD Models Only in this sec tion 230 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Automatic Transmission WARNING Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P or R to D should be done only after the It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of
100. ESERVOIR CENTER 815a20a8 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN 2 8L TURBO DIESEL ENGINE AIR CLEANER COOLANT TRANSMISSION FUEL WATER BRAKE FILTER BOTTLE DIPSTICK SEPARATOR BATTERY FLUID WINDSHIELD ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL POWER DISTRIBUTION WASHER FLUID FILL DIPSTICK CENTER 81464efd ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light on could cause further damage to the emis sion control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage
101. FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE On vehicles so equipped the radio steering wheel radio controls and 6 disc CD DVD changer will 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature SALES CODE RAZ AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER CONTROLS NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower left side of your radio faceplate BM TAPE Domem auo vera ER EE vx x Ga Ne WE SZ me RAZ Radio 80ef1609 Operating Instructions Radio NOTE Power to operate the radio is controlled by the ignition switch It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio on Turn the volume control clockwise to increase the volume The volume will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed Seek Button Radio Mode Press and release the Se
102. G YOUR VEHICLE BEEN hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will Washing have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap and rinse The following maintenance recommendations will enable the panels completely with clear water you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu resistance built into your vehicle lated on your vehicle wash it as soon as possible What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle e Use Mopar Auto Polish to remove road film and stains and to polish your vehicle Take care never to scratch the paint The most common causes are e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near sea coast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least
103. In the presence of a properly seated occupant when the PAD indicator light is illuminated the airbag is OFF Also when the Occu pant Classification System detects either an empty seat or a weight less than the predetermined threshold the ORC will not illuminate the PAD indicator light even though the airbag is turned OFF 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e The Belt Tension Sensor BTS is located at the outboard passenger lap belt anchor The BTS creates a signal based on outboard lap belt tension This signal is sent to the OCM to ensure that the resultant bladder pressure increase due to applied lap belt tension does not cause a small occupant to be classified as a larger occupant e The Bladder Mat and Pressure Sensor are located beneath the seat cushion foam The pressure sensor sends a signal to the OCM The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case o
104. Message 309 E Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs 223 desis oda PISS piatimi 310 l Replacement Parts esser Cees x 311 H Dealer Service 2 0 312 Bl Maintenance Procedures 0 4 312 Engine Oll iiia pEE EA PER ba ee 312 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 316 Spatk Pl gs s 069LRRRIDA ot iad Ren Catalytic Converter Engine Timing Belt 2 4L Engine 319 Ignition Wiring System 24L Engine 319 Crankcase Emission Control System 319 Air Cleaner Filter 0 000 319 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Maintenance Free Battery llus 320 Air Conditioner Maintenance 321 Power Steering Fluid Check 322 Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication 6 iecur ee ta pee Pees 322 Body Lubrication estey tarse e aa a eA 323 Windshield Wiper Blades 323 Windshield Washers 0005 324 Exhaust System sorene MaE E a eee 324 Cooling System ye naad ra e ER ere Ronde 325 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 330 Brake System x5 Ges eR ere XR 330 Automatic Transmission sss 333 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission lle 335 Manual Transmission
105. NG YOUR VEHICLE 29 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation If your Remote Keyless Entry fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of batteries is from one to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is the Panasonic CR2032 or equivalent 1 Pry the transmitter halves apart with a dime or similar object Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket material during removal g Separating Transmitter Halves 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch the battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 81182c72 3 Reassemble the transmitter case Snap the halves together and test transmitter operation 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors swing gate swing gate flip up window and ignition for unautho rized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn headlights and tail lights will sound flash repeatedly for three minutes If disturbance is still present driver s doo
106. OTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons simply repeat the Programming HomeLink pro cess es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 If the message TRANSMIT appears on the HomeLink display but your device does not activate the device may be equipped with a rolling code system Continue with steps five through seven below to complete the program ming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 5 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 6 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manu facturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step 7 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons simply repeat the Programming Homelink pro cess 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x If after programming the HomeLink Wireless Control
107. R 203 Satellite Radio Antenna ea ises ii eiie aas 207 Schedule Maintenance 360 378 Seat Belt Reminder 0 00000 46 en INDEX 413 Seat Belts Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 43 And Pregnant Women 044 47 Child Restraint iurare ERG 63 70 Extender sese e egent ES 48 Inspecti n 2 20524 gh dees aoe ke 74 Maintenance cauta puerai ae RPG e 341 Operating Instructions 39 Pr tensioniers 3 xj die and ee Pa eoa S 46 Reminder siis be mme RR mer eed 175 Sedl8 xi eG bea RE ue ERE RR EE Y ENS 108 Adjustment i2 icc eb eer Creed 108 Cleaning csuec eex eS xr ee ESTER 340 Head Restraints 0 0 0 0 e eee 110 Heated 5 295g zer die gre tone eR re 112 POWED duwioac Keowee ae Rom oe RE ee aes 111 Rear Folding Zuessueskupe mes ite cae e s 113 Reclining iaa deeem e pg ana Roe doses 109 Security Against Theft cessas stesse ersi 22 30 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 30 Selection of Oil llle 314 315 Selec Trac Operation sees Rem men 240 Sentry Key eue adeo care ed er e Res d 16 Sentry Key Programming llle 18 Sentry Key Replacement 0 17 Service Assistance eee eee eee 390 Service Contract ouat vensa rea WEAR RA GR ATA 392 Service Manuals ee eee eee 396 Setting the Clock 0 0 0 0 0 asein 176 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 229 Shif ng ils ete eee REA rd EA 2
108. Rearview Mirrors 0 000 e eee eens 81 Reclining Front Seats 0 000000 109 Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine PANTS 5o as deus dp Sn a een Dig danach des 357 Recreational Towing oes sii lille 287 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 287 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 288 Reformulated Gasoline 0040 277 Refrigerant 6 6 eee 322 Reminder Lights On 0005 120 Reminder Seat Belt 00 0000 eee 46 Remote Keyless Entry 0005 25 Remote Sound System Controls 208 Replacement Keys llle 17 Replacement Parts is sese ees 311 Replacement Tires zie rem ape eR 266 Reporting Safety Defects liiis 395 Re Priming Diesel Fuel System 225 Restraint Head 1 110 Restraints Child iiia 394 0444 3 00 Y oa 63 Restraints Infant 0 0 llle 64 Restraints Occupant llle ee 37 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 04 151 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 236 Roof Rack u cee Re eee ea cee as 159 Rotation Tires ese net peame 3p oe eRe Cae 275 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 74 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 75 Safety Defects Reporting 6 395 Safety Exhaust Gas 43 xot doe pee x Cheba dios 73 Safety Information Tire 06 254 Safety DipS 44452415400 PERPE Ra eee iiis 73 Satellite Radio xe eR E R
109. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE E INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE cece ccc hh mnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ce ccc cece ccc c ccc hh hh nnn Fs STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc cece cece cece reer s hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece c ccc c ccc c cnc hh t tn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE cece cece cee cre cere REEERE EEEE 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2 2 cc ccc cece eer c reer eee e cence reece hn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE cee cece ccc cece ccc ceevcecevcecvens 10 UD So LR CE TI erce eee Information Provided by DEALER INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Blintoduction 0 000000 00 0000 4 Bl Warnings And Cautions 004 7 Roll Over Warning ses cadere dadas smits 5 Bl Vehicle Identification Number 8 Bl How To Use This Manual 7 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION Thank you for selecting a Jeep Liberty and welcome to our worldwide family This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both on road and off road use It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive vehicles were not intended However on road ride and handling will have a different feel from what drivers experience with other vehicles so take time to become familiar with yo
110. System the hand held transmitter and or other HomeLink units in other vehicles fail to activate the rolling code equipped device you may need to clear or erase the device s receiver memory Refer to your garage door opener s Owner s Manual for the proce dure or contact HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com After clearing the re ceiver you must reprogram the original hand held transmitter s to the receiver using the procedure in the garage door opener s Owner s Manual Finally repro gram the hand held transmitter s to HomeLink using the steps under Programming HomeLink Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the Program ming HomeLink procedures regardless of where you live replace step two with the following NOTE If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle
111. TANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Bl Warranty Information 05 393 Vehicle cp 390 Mi Mopar Parts 305 Prepare For The Appointment 4a4 4n lt s 408 390 lll Reporting Safety Defects 00 0 395 l repatezAGEISES sue 3 a pete dor oo es 390 a TT RLLRREILIROLRLI2i 224 395 Bo Reasonable ity Request oque ps sets 990 Bl Publication Order Forms 396 Bl If You Need Assistance 00005 390 390 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a
112. TRUMENT PANEL 169 8 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system B called OBD II which monitors engine and auto matic transmission control systems This light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such has a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is running the Malfunction Indicator Light may flash to alert of serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs See page 309 for more information 9 Anti Lock Warning Light ABS If Equipped This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS described elsewhere in this manual This light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as three seconds If the light comes back on immediately or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is
113. To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the re cliner only when the vehicle is parked Recline Control Lever 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjustable head restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The head restraints have a locking button that must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button Adjustable Head Restraints ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Power Seat Adjuster If Equipped WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or e
114. UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators The UConnect system will provide notification to inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status has low signal strength or has a low battery when you are trying to place a phone call Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mute Un mute Mute off When
115. a very rough road the CD player may skip momentarily Skipping will not damage the disc or the player and play will resume automatically As a safeguard and to protect your CD player one of the following warning symbols may appear on your display A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot CD HOT will pause the operation Play can be resumed when the operating temperature is corrected or another MODE is selected CD ERROR will appear on the display if the laser is unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons e Warped disc e Excessive vibration e Disc inserted upside down e Damaged disc e Water condensation on optics SALES CODE RB1 AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH DVD GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM 100 3 MHz 810774da RB1 Radio The navigation system provides maps turn identifica tion selection menus and instructions for selecting a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 variety of destinations and routes Refer to your Navi gation User s Manual for detailed operating instruc tions NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with the CD Changer option you will not be able to use the Naviga tion system and the CD Player simultaneously Always remove the Navigation DVD before inserting another disc SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to
116. abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident roll over of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully INTRODUCTION 5 A WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up Roll Over Warning Label 80bfe0f0 6 INTRODUCTION EE Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 million annually In a roll over crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings
117. adio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 ESN SID Access With RBP RBU RAZ RB1 and RBO Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will be displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB RAH and RBK Radios Press the MODE button repeatedly until S A appears in the display A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP RBU RAZ RB1 and RBQ Radios Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SIRIUS appears in the display These radios will also display the following e After 3 seconds the current channel name and channel number will be displayed for 5 seconds The current program type and channel number will then be displayed for 5 seconds e The current channel number will then be displayed until an action occurs A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for the next channel Press the top
118. age Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended E when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the ph
119. aking may 17 Part Time Indicator Light If Equipped PART This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in TIME the PART TIME four wheel drive high range mode and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed See page 236 for more information 18 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions O including brake fluid level and parking brake BRAKE application If the light comes on it may indi cate that the parking brake is applied or there is a low brake fluid level On vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS it may also indicate an ABS malfunction that could lead to reduced braking perfor mance occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immedi ately The operation of the BRAKE warning light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Also the light will come on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking bra
120. alcohol base antifreeze coolant products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the antifreeze coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based antifreeze coolant Use of Propylene Glycol base antifreeze coolant is not recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved antifreeze coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This antifreeze coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles before replacement To prevent reducing this ex tended maintenance period it is important that you use the same antifreeze coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT coolant When adding antifreeze coolant a minimum solution of 50 recommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water antifreeze coolant solu tion The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper l
121. an up ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant recovery bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the antifreeze coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the antifreeze coolant should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for antifreeze coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Ad vise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 When additional antifreeze coolant is needed to main tain the proper level it should be added to the coolant recovery bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot water to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check antifreeze coolant freeze point in the system
122. and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the
123. ap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use with this vehicle When tightening the gas cap tighten until 2 or 3 clicks are heard to insure that the cap is properly seated NOTE A loose gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate 80c579c7 Fuel Filler Cap ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Overhead Console in Section 3 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system WARNING e Never add fuel when the engine is running e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the tank filled TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find i
124. ation 198 Bl Sales Code RB1 AM FM Stereo Radio With DVD GPS Navigation System 203 H Satellite Radio If Equipped System Activation les Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID 0 0000 204 Selecting Satellite Mode In RBB RAH And RBK Radios 6 52 RERO eats ae bale E 205 Selecting Satellite Mode In RBP RBU RAZ RB1 And RBQ Radios 205 Selecting a Channel 00 0 206 Storing And Selecting Pre Set Channels 206 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Using The PTY Program Type Button IF Equipped 35 teosk ee RE get inter 206 PTY Dutton Scan sk RR ERR RR 206 PTY Button Seek 0006 207 Satellite Antenna llis 207 Reception Quality escama sare iaa ane are a 207 lll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 208 Radio Operation 00000 209 Tape Player CD Player Single Disc In Radio 209 CD Player 6 Disc In Cargo Area 209 ll Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance 210 ll CD DVD Disc Maintenance 211 lll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 211 Bl Climate Controls 0000 212 Blower Control ike RES 212 Temperature Control 6 212 Mode Selectioni ace see Ie ones 212 Operatin
125. ator on the battery If the indicator is light or yellow replace the battery 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an unintended electrical contact 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in P Park or manual transmission in N Neutral and turn the ignition to OFF for both vehicles 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then connect the other end to a non paint metal surface on the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M NOTE To start the vehicle following connection of a e Do not use a booster battery or any other booster booster battery the Sec
126. ayed for a 5 second scan once around the FM Band and stop at the last station The PTY icon will then turn off Balance The Balance control adjusts the left to right speaker bal ance Push in the button and it will pop out Adjust the balance and push the button back in The balance will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is turned Fade The Fade control provides for balance between the front and rear speakers Push in the button and it will pop out Adjust the balance and push the button back in The fade will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is turned Tone Control Slide the Bass and or Treble controls up or down to adjust the sound for the desired tone The treble and bass will be displayed and continuously updated while the slide is moved AM FM Selection Press the AM FM button to change from AM to FM The operating mode will be displayed next to the station frequency The display will show ST when a stereo station is received Scan Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next station in either AM or FM pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next Pressing the AM FM button continues the search in the alternate frequency band To stop the search press SCAN a second time 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se To Set The Radio Push button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pu
127. cant SAE 80W 90 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W 90 or equivalent For trailer towing the lubricant should be replaced with Mopar Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 or equivalent Models equipped with Trac Lok require a limited slip additive Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 360 W Maintenance Schedules Diesel Engines ll Maintenance Schedules Gasoline Engines 360 Schedule B Diesel Engines Schedule B Gasoline Engines 363 Schedule A Diesel Engines Schedule A Gasoline Engines 373 CO MmreoemMm zon mMo2Z2zr2zama2z rzZ M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 360 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehi
128. cates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire EN STARTING AND OPERATING 257 Tire Identification Number TIN located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted however the date code may only be on one side Tires with on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 198
129. ccident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds correct tire inflation pressure is very important ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Radial Ply Tires Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not WARNING spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires WARNING on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your dealer for radial tire repairs Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 266 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are narrow strips 1 16 inch 1 6 mm thick and are found in the tread pattern grooves When the tread pattern is worn down to these treadwear indicato
130. cle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger side airbag is mounted in ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size Also the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification Refer to Occupant Classification System in this section This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with window bags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG 80f0cbbd Window Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured be cause the airbags are not
131. cle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES GASOLINE ENGINES There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 361 e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert driving e If equipped for and operated with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first a
132. continue to tune until you release the button The frequency will be displayed and continu ously updated while the button is pressed To Set The Radio Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button SET 1 will show in the display window Select the 1 5 button you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM stations to be locked into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Audio The audio button controls the BASS TREBLE BAL ANCE and FADE Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to increase or decrease the Treble tones es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Press the AUDIO button a
133. crease or decrease due to objects hanging on the seat other passengers pushing on the seat or objects lodged underneath the seat If there is a rapid change in temperature or humidity the OCS may not be able to properly approximate occupant size If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If there is a fault present in the system the AIRBAG warning light will light indicating that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer In the pres ence of an occupant in the passenger seat if both the PAD indicator light located in the front passenger grab handle and AIRBAG warning light located in the instrument cluster are illuminated the airbag will be disabled The ORC will not allow front airbag deployment in the event of a collision for occupants classified into the empty or child size categories The PAD indicator light will illuminate indicating that the Passenger Airbag is OFF when the OCS has determined that the occupant size category is a child Also when the seat is empty or an object that weighs less than a predetermined threshold is placed on the seat the light will remain OFF The PAD indicator light is an amber light located on the grab handle in front of the passenger seat Indicator Light Location For almost all sizes
134. ct vehicle position following a tire rotation 276 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram ERU ex E o 8031e864 FUEL REQUIREMENTS GASOLINE ENGINES Your engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having 800dfab6 an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasoline and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING R M 2 METHOD Mid grade gasoline 89 octane will enhance engine per formance during the following conditions 3 7L Only e Hot weather e Towing e Hard accelerations e Hilly terrain e Low humidity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver e
135. ction When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Windshield Washers IB The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not antifreeze coolant and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable They could ignite a
136. ctronic Vehicle Information Center 131 Smoker s Package If Equipped 150 Customer Programmable Features 132 W Cargo Area Features sees eR Rs 151 Mini Trip Computer 0 135 Cargo Light 2 2 4 sa cece d aes 151 lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 139 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped 151 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Cargo Tie Down Hooks 0 4 152 Rear Window Wiper Washer 156 Cargo Organizer If Equipped 154 Rear Window Defroster 0005 158 Bl Rear Window Features 0 0 0 156 lal Roof Luggage Rack 159 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle Adjusting Rear View Mirror 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Inside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pres
137. culation mode to maintain comfort Window Fogging In mild but rainy or humid weather windows will fog on the inside To rapidly clear the fog off all the windows select the defrost mode turn the temperature control knob fully clockwise and position the blower control to its highest speed Once the windshield has been cleared adjust the controls for your comfort On air conditioned vehicles the compressor will operate when in the Mix or Defrost modes and when the outside temperature is approximately 30 F 1 C to provide additional defrost defog ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Summer Operation Air conditioned equipped vehicle s cooling systems must be protected with a high quality engine coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recom mended Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Information Provided by DEALER STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures cds soi eek rae 220 6 Speed Manual Transmission 227 Manual Transmission sess 220 Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission
138. d continu ously updated while the button is pressed To Set The Radio Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET RND button SET 1 will show in the display window Select the 1 6 button you wish to lock onto this station and press es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be locked into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the corresponding push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Audio The audio button controls the BASS TREBLE BAL ANCE and FADE Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be displayed Press the SEEK or
139. d equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 397 Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals Information Provided by DEALER INDEX 400 INDEX MM ABS Anti Lock Brake System 170 247 Adding Washer Fluid 00050 157 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 319 Air Conditioner Maintenance 321 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 214 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 322 Air Filter 2222293 RES EE SESS 319 Air Pressure Tires senco netrenirani r thani 263 Airbag iiu a 5053 ee ed dace ea r 48 Airbag Deployment llle 59 Airbag light i cee eed ea cows aes 53 62 174 Airbag Maintenance 0 0 0 0 000s 62 Airbag WindOW cd users Ec eae ae ESA 49 ALAR enne did ere ee E ERN ceded ARIE erred E 30 Alarm Pate 2332244 eg a bbs DS eU 27 Alignment and Balance 00 267 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio sn 207 Antifreeze Engine
140. d holding the UConnect and Voice Recognition buttons simultaneously for 15 seconds Normally you do not need to exercise this feature Power Up After switching ignition key from off to either On or ACC position or after a reset you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Voice Command Tree Main Menu Towing English Redial Assistance Emergency Espanol Phonebook Francais Last See Number The 32 name language Phonebook See Setup on Phone specific phonebook will be Flowchart Flowchart is redialed used The phones paired are available across all languages Number Number associated is Dialed with entry is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 815a53fc 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phonebook Entries Listed one at a time New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Location Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added 8131b294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Voice Tree Setup Setup E Pairin Select Phone Language Prompts Toggle Pair List Phones Delete Say Priorit istal Confirmation ee y y Select a
141. d pro longed braking You could have an accident WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid as seal damage will result Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid 7 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check 3 7L Gasoline Engine 42RLE and 2 8L Diesel Engine 545RFE This fluid level should be checked when the engine is fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is heated to its no
142. driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h 238 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the transfer case WARNING e Because 4 wheel drive provides improved trac tion there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road con ditions permit You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case Neutral N position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Rear Wheel Drive High Range Normal street and highway driving Dry hard surfaced roads 4H 4 Wheel Drive
143. e and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 811ad0d0 Tire Placard Location The Cold Inflation Pressure of each tire should be checked and adjusted at least once every month Check 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor tempera tures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Inflation pressures specified on the label are always Cold Inflation Pressure Cold inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has been idle for at least 3 hours or driven less than a mile after a 3 hour period The cold inflation pressure of each tire should be set according to the manufacturers recom mended pressure and must not exceed the maximum values molded into the tire sidewall Tire pressures may increase from 13 to 40 kPa 2 to 6 psi 0 138 to 0 414 bar during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup High Speed Operation WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious a
144. e compartment dividers and lock into place Cargo Organizer Removal Loosen screw then lift lever from each mount located on the floor of the rear cargo area and remove the cargo organizer from the vehicle REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer A rotary ring switch on the control lever located on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch up to the DEL Delay position or the ON position will activate the wiper Rotating the switch ring beyond the ON or OFF position will activate the rear washer The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at If the swing gate flip up window is open or the swing gate is open connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade When the swing gate flip up window or the swing gate is closed the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs to be turned OFF and then to ON to restart the rear wiper NOTE The rear swing gate will lock while the rear wiper is operat
145. e into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Route the tether strap over the seat back and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head restraint between the head restraint posts Tether Strap Mounting 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
146. e of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press the RND button 4 button a second time to stop Random Play Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the CD player the optional remote CD changer and the Satellite Radio if equipped When Satellite Radio if equipped is selected SAT will appear in your radio display A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the Satellite mode Time Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day CD Changer Control Capability If Equipped This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD changer available through Mopar Accessories The fol lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate this CD changer Mode Button To activate the CD changer press the MODE button until CD information appears on the display 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Disc Up Program Button 1 Press the DISC up button 1 button to play the next available disc Disc Down Program Button 5 Press the DISC down button 5 button to play the previous disc Seek Button Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the same disc A SEEK symbol will appear on the display Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons Press and hold the FF button for fast forward Press and hold the RW button for fast reverse The audio output can be heard when fast forward and fast reverse are activated Ra
147. e overhead console the transmitters may also be programmed through the EVIC display For additional information refer to Overhead Console If Equipped in Section 3 Up to 4 transmitters can be programmed to your vehicle To obtain additional transmitters contact your autho rized dealer To program a transmitter within 23 50 feet 7 15 meters of the vehicle perform the following procedure 1 Gather every transmitter that is to be used with the vehicle including any transmitters that are currently programmed 2 Enter Program Mode Turn the ignition to the ON position and using a currently programmed transmitter press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter Continue to hold the Unlock button wait at least 4 but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the PANIC button for at least 1 second Release both buttons simultaneously 3 Program Each Transmitter All transmitters to be used with your vehicle must be programmed as follows Press and release the Lock and Unlock buttons simul taneously followed by a press and release of ANY button on each transmitter to be programmed You will hear a chime when a transmitter has been successfully pro grammed General Information This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTI
148. ear seat whenever possible How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Energy Management Feature WARNING This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the driver and front passenger e After a vehicle collision the driver and front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury passenger outboard seat belt system must be in the event of a head on collision checked by a qualified technician to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all seat belts should be checked for proper function This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly automatic lockin
149. ecessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plat
150. ecommendations New Vehicle 73 Bulb Replacement ea ssec cr he 350 351 Bulbs LA SHE spres oberen ege ees 350 Calibration Compass sporeste ecs uere kani sa 137 Capacities Fluid iier E REA eb 356 Caps Filler Fuel 2e remque og ee d sieut md gnat die 281 Radiator Coolant Pressure 327 Car Washes e s eed done ben een see IUE 338 Carbon Monoxide Warning 141 280 Cargo Area Cover ae tosses doenn eee ane eee 151 Cargo Area Features 000000000 eee 151 Cargo Compartment ISI aisi soe ame teas ose ee 117 151 Luggage Cartier orearen itene a eee 159 Cargo Light 143 cs wrkacee dee Reed es s 117 151 Cargo Organizer ia i wince ga ea ada Mad Race 154 Cargo le Downs 4424 e RR eA 152 Carpeting sack sedan Ran Sach ae Roe pees 341 Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance 210 Cassette Tape Player Catalytic Converter 402 INDEX aa Caution Exhaust Gas 000 73 141 CD Changer zie e IR xR ts 187 193 CD Player 22 tn be Eea we wn 184 189 191 195 198 CD Player Maintenance 04 211 Cellular Phone 0 0 00 cee eee ae 85 211 Center High Mounted Stop Light 355 Chains Tir sserrep inss 4r ETG Or eR 274 Changing A Flat Tire 294 Charging System Light 170 Chart lireSizing i e RR teen ee as 255 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 310 Child Restraint llle 63 68 70 Child Restraint Tether
151. ect roll over or rear impacts OCS Occupant Classification Module The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the Passenger Airbag Disabled PAD Indicator Light START or RUN positions These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and 2 ARCO Ne EIS column and knee bolsters If the key is in the OFF Pressure Sensor Bladder Assembly and Belt Tension position in the ACC position or not in the ignition Sensor the airbags are not on and will not inflate How The Airbag System Works Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light located in the instrument cluster and PAD indicator light located in the front passenger grab handle for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off The PAD indicator light will function normally Refer to Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate Based on the level of collision severity the front control module determines the proper rate of inflation The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
152. ed off the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect the tape from any damage When power is restored to the tape player the pinch roller will automatically reengage and the tape will resume play Noise Reduction The Dolby Noise Reduction System is on whenever the tape player is on but may be switched off To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System Press the Dolby button button 2 after you insert the tape The NR light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is off The Dolby System is automatically reactivated each time a tape is inserted Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo ratories Licensing Corporation Operating Instructions CD Player NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the volume control ON before the CD player will operate CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Inserting The Compact Disc The CD player contained within the radio is not a multi disc changer and will only accept one CD Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 If the volume control is ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play
153. ed as a guide in deter mining the amount of engine idle time required to TURBOCHARGER COOL DOWN CHART Driving Conditions Load Turbocharger Temperature Idle Time in minutes Before Shut Down Stop amp Go Empty Cool Less than 1 Stop amp Go Medium Warm 1 Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2 City Traffic Max GCWR Warm 3 Highway Speeds Max GCWR Warm 4 Uphill Grade Max GCWR Hot 5 EN STARTING AND OPERATING 225 Diesel Fuel Water Separator A diesel fuel water separator separates the water nor mally found in diesel fuel A manual hand prime pump is located on the filter head for re priming the fuel system The fuel water separator is located on the driver side cowl in the engine compartment Refer to 2 8L Turbo Diesel Engine Compartment in Section 7 for location NOTE If the Water In Fuel Warning Light located in the instrument cluster comes on this indicates that water has collected in the fuel filter and should be drained immediately See your authorized dealer for service Should your vehicle run out of fuel the fuel system must be re primed in order to start the engine Factors such as temperature which affects the viscosity of the fuel how long the vehicle has been sitting and other factors will influence how quickly the engine starts Re Priming the Diesel Fuel System The following procedure must be followed after com pletely running out of fuel 1 Add a minimum of 2 gallons
154. ed weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustra tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg en STARTING AND OPERATING 261 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 1 200 Ibs 865 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Overloading of your
155. egade 205 H3 Front Park Turn Lights 3157 P27 7W Front Side Marker 00 2 000 168 Headlighits serin vnica tene thes 9007QL Rear License Plate Light 168 Rear Stop Tail Lights 3157 P27 7W Rear Turn Signal Lights 2 3757 APY27 7W NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 BULB REPLACEMENT CAUTION Head Light Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil 1 Open the hood contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the 2 Reach behind the headlamp unit in the engine com bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean partment to access the headlamp bulb lock ring the bulb with rubbing alcohol 3 Firmly grasp the lock ring on the back of the headlamp unit housing 5 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb 4 Rotate the lock ring on the back of the headlamp housing counter clockwise to unlock it 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Front Turn Signal 1 Remove the screw from the turn signal park lamp unit 2 Pull the inboard side of the lamp away enough to disengage the tab that secures the outboard side of the lamp from the slot in the front bumper fascia 3 Rotate the bulb socket counter clockwise to unlock it CAUTION Do not touch the new
156. ek button to search for the next station in either the AM or FM mode Press the top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down Holding the button will by pass stations until you release the button E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 Tuning Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency If you press and hold the button the radio will continue to tune until you release the button The frequency will be displayed and continu ously updated while the button is pressed Radio Data System RDS The Radio Data System allows radio broadcasting sta tions to send data signals on a subcarrier frequency which is added to the stereo signal RDS was developed to give FM receivers user friendly features such as Program Service name PS and Program Type PTY Program Service name is typically used by the broad caster to display the station s name or call letters for example WNIC Typically these are 8 characters in length and are displayed by the radio for those stations which are broadcasting this information PTY Program Type is used to characterize the station s program ma terial for example Rock Music PTY Program Type Button Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do no
157. el affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equip ment Vehicle Identification Number NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN plate ee INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death Information Provided by DEALER THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys 004 14 Ignition Rey ig ccce wha eas oe x ed 14 Key In Ignition Reminder 16 H Sentry Key Immobilizer System 16 Important Note About Service 17 Replacement Keys oreca soat pae saa akaa 17 Customer Key Programming 18 General Information 00 05 18 ll Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped 19 To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel 19 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 19 B Muminated Entry ooo 19 Bl Doors And Door Locks 20 Manual Door Locks 00 00005 21 Power Door Locks If Equipped 23 Automatic Door Locks If Equipped 23 Child Protection Locks 04 24 Bl Remote Keyless Entry
158. ellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice recognition button and say Select or Delete Also see next two sections for alternate way of doing this Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone e The phone names along with priority numbers will be played 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e When prompted say the priority number of the cellu lar phone you wish to select You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and say the priority number The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority ph
159. em The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity section Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination The UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe
160. enger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Classification System serviced as well ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Enhanced Accident Response System E A R S If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional the interior lights will turn on and the power door locks if equipped will unlock 5 2 seconds after airbag deployment Also the fuel system will shut off immediately upon airbag deployment gasoline models only The ignition switch will need to be cycled i e turn the ignition key from the ON position to the LOCK position after ap proximately 5 seconds in order to restart the vehicle 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING WARNING Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermar Airbag Warning Light ket side steps or running boards You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag your protection in an impact The airbag sys
161. engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element Replace as X X X X X necessary Replace the engine air filter element X X X Inspect the boost pressure solenoid filter Replace X X X X X as necessary Replace the boost pressure solenoid filter if not X previously replaced Replace the fuel filter water separator unit X Replace the engine accessory drive belt X Inspect the brake linings X X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X X Drain and refill the transfer case fluid Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid and replace sump filter gt X lt gt lt gt lt a SCHEDULE B DIESEL ENGINES 383 freeze Miles 68 750 75 000 81 250 87 500 93 750 100 000 Kilometers 110 000 120 000 130 000 140 000 150 000 160 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element Re X X X X X X place as necessary Replace the engine air filter element X X X Inspect the boost pressure solenoid filter Re X X X X X X lace as necessary Replace the boost pressure solenoid filter if X not previously replaced Replace the engine accessory drive belt X Replace the engine timing belt and idler pul X leys Inspect the engine timing belt tensioner re X place if necessary t Replace the fuel filter water separat
162. eplace the engine coolant anti freeze if not done at X E 102 000 miles 163 000 km S Replace the timing belt 2 4L Only o X 8 Drain and refill the transfer case fluid X Inspection and service should be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all receipts This maintenance is recommended by the manufac turer to the owner but it is not required to maintain emissions warranty M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 378 SCHEDULE A GASOLINE ENGINES ME MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES DIESEL ENGINES There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert driving NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule B Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched ule B Use the schedule that best describes
163. er EVIC in the overhead console all warnings including door GATE GLASS and LOWASH will only be displayed in the EVIC display not in the instrument cluster For addi tional information refer to Overhead Console If Equipped in Section 3 Door Open Display If any other active warnings including GATE GLASS or LOWASH are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur One ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total After this the display will continue to cycle only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door Door Lock Plunger 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING CAUTION For personal security and safety in the event of an An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as Always remove the key from the ignition and lock well as when you park and leave the vehicle all of the doors when
164. er CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CLIMATE CONTROLS The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs and a push button These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 813e0ae2 Manual Climate Control Blower Control The rotary knob on the left controls the blower and can be set in one of four positions from Low to High Temperature Control The degree of comfort can be selected by rotating the temperature control knob on the right The coldest tem perature setting is fully counterclockwise and the warm est setting fully clockwise The knob ca
165. eratures This engine oil improves low tempera ture starting and vehicle fuel economy Refer to your engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 Engine Oil Selection Diesel Engines For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends using synthetic engine oils that are API Certified SL CF and meet the require ments of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 10725 Engine Oil Viscosity 2 8L Diesel Engines Use SAE 0W 40 Mobil 19 Synthetic Engine Oil that meets API categories CF or better and the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 10725 If you cannot find SAE 0W 40 then SAE 5W 40 Mobil 19 Synthetic Engine Oil is acceptable Any engine oil that does not meet the manufacturer s requirements should not be used Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils All Engines There are a number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi synthetic If you chose to use such a product use only those oils that are certified by the American Petroleum Institute API to display the symbol on the front of the container or the proper ACEA category and show the recommended SAE viscosity grade Follow the service schedule that describes your driving type
166. es of the accelerator pedal may be required after shifting This will induce a torque interrupt and allow full engagement of the newly selected position With the vehicle stationary it may be necessary to shift the automatic transmission from D Drive to R Reverse and back to D Drive after shifting This will allow full engagement of the newly selected position Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 4 PART TIME to 4 FULL TIME or 4 FULL TIME to 4 PART TIME Shifting between 4 PART TIME and 4 FULL TIME can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 55 mph 88 km h With the vehicle in motion two momentary releases of the accelerator pedal may be required after shifting This will induce a torque interrupt and allow full engagement of the newly selected position With the vehicle stationary it may be necessary to shift the automatic transmission from D Drive to R Reverse and back to D Drive after 244 STARTING AND OPERATING ME shifting This will allow full engagement of the newly selected position Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 4 FULL TIME to 4 LO or 4 LO to 4 FULL TIME With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission to N Neutral While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause in transfer case
167. estart the engine and shift to R Reverse Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a hill in R Reverse gear Never back down a hill in N Neutral using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and right This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case to 4L or 4LO range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible EN STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Af
168. evel of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing antifreeze coolant types will decrease the life of the antifreeze coolant and will require more frequent antifreeze coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of antifreeze coolant and to insure that antifreeze coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add antifreeze coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT antifreeze coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store HOAT antifreeze coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Cle
169. f The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature Control to maximum heat the Mode Control to floor and the Fan Control to High This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system If the pointer rises to the H hot mark on a vehicle equipped with a gasoline engine pull over and stop the vehicle Do not turn the engine off Idle the vehicle with the air conditioning turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service 294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME If the coolant temperature of a vehicle equipped witha JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING diesel engine approaches the H hot mark a warning chime will sound to alert the driver The air conditioning system will turn off automatically and power loss will occur until the engine temperature returns to the normal e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous range The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never ge
170. f vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined 14 Cruise Indicator Light CRUISE This indicator lights when the speed control system is turned ON 15 Oil Pressure Warning Light QE Shows low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on have the system checked by your autho rized dealer If the warning light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED Also a single chime will sound 16 Transmission Temperature Warning Light TRANS This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing or snow plowing If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in N Neutral until the light goes off ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 WARNING Driving a vehicle with the BRAKE warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking per formance or vehicle stability during br
171. f a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci dent A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way e Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 e Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover e Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags when the impact sensors detect a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a
172. failure If adjustment is re quired adjust the belts according to the specifications and procedures shown in the Service Manual Special tools are required to properly measure tension and to restore belt tension to factory specifications Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 Spark Plugs CAUTION Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your stalled at the mileage specified in the appropriate main vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In tenance chart The entire set should be replaced if there is the event of engine malfunction particularly involv any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin in the engine compartment for spark plug information ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat Catalytic Converter resulting in possible damage to the converter and The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel vehicle only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the converter as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not
173. fore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not neces sarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be done when ever the brake system is serviced and every engine oil change 7 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the Brake Warning Light shows system failure Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type WARNING Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during har
174. g Tips scie des REY ee E 214 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INTERIOR CONTROLS 1 2 3 1 4 1 7 10 9 8 7 6 1 Air Outlet 4 Hazard Warning Flasher 7 Knee Bolster 10 Power Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 5 Passenger Airbag 8 Radio 3 Drivers Airbag Cigar Lighter 6 Glove Compartment 9 Climate Controls 81432305 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 2 4L 3 7L ENGINES 19 18 17 16 813c7efa UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 2 8L DIESEL ENGINES FULL O pART 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 28 14 13 12 11 81377a9b 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Tachometer Indicates the permissible engine revolutions per minute for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 2 Turn Signal Indicator Light The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signals when using the multi function control lever A chime will sound if the turn signals are left on continuously for 2 miles 3 km until they are deacti vated 3 High Beam Indicator Light This light shows that the headlights are on high beam Pull the multi function control lever to wards the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high to low beam 4 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 5 Tire Pressure Monitor Warning Light If Equipped This
175. g ae E belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision NOTE The Seat Belt Indicator Light will remain on until the driver s seat belt is buckled Removing Slack From Belt 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 6 To release the belt push the red button marked PRESS on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the the webbing to allow it to retract fully strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdo WARNING men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision low as possible and keep it snug and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing pretensioner etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any s
176. g alcohol 5 Replace the bulb 2 Remove the light bar cover ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Back Up Lights Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 1 Open the swing gate 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL 2 Remove the two Torx fasteners 89 um 81589662 2 Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL 3 Remove rear lamp assembly housing 4 Rotate the socket on the back of the lamp housing 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket counter clockwise to unlock it 4 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the 5 Replace the bulb CHMSL 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 20 5 Gallons 78 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 4 3 7 Liter Engines SAE 5W 30 API Certified Engine Oil 5 Ots 4 7 Liters 2 8 Liter Diesel Engine SAE 0W 40 Mobil 19 Synthetic API 6 4 Ots 6 1 Liters Certified Engine Oil Cooling System 2 4 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 10 Ots 9 5 Liters Mile Formula 3 7 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 14 Ots 13 2 Liters Mile Formula 2 8 Liter Diesel Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 11 8 Ots 12 5 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubr
177. g re tractor feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Seat Belt Pretensioners The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision This device improves the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the front Airbag Control Module Like the front airbags the pretensioners are a single use item After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners they must be replaced Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle t
178. g the wheels of it will correct the situation 254 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY d AND STANDARDS E MM TEMPERATURE CODE CETT wo GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LI Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT EN STARTING AND OPERATING 255 Ti
179. ght can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the lens a second time Multi Function Control Lever The multi function control lever controls the operation of the park lights headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals Multi Function Control Lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights and Headlights Turn the end cap of the multi function control lever to the first detent for parking lights and instrument panel lights Turn to the second detent for headlight operation To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the multi function control lever up or down High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Pull the multi function control lever towards you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the multi function control lever a second time to switch the head lights to LOW beam The High Beam Indicator Light will illuminate when the high beams are on Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multi function control lever toward the steering wheel This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released The High Beam Indicator Light will illuminate when the high beams are on Turn Signals Move the multi funct
180. ghtly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say E Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico city and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the DaimlerChrysler Corporation 24 Hour Towing Assistance Program Guide 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Paging To learn how to page refer to section Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to section Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system
181. grammed using the key fob refer to Remote Keyless Entry earlier in this section Headlamp Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose when exiting the vehicle to have the headlamps remain on for 30 60 or 90 seconds or not remain on Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select 30 60 90 or OFF Service Interval When this feature is selected a service interval between 2 000 miles 3 200 km and 6 000 miles 10 000 km in 500 mile 800 km increments may be selected Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select distances between 2 000 miles 3 200 km and 6 000 miles 10 000 km in 500 mile 800 km increments Reset Service Distance Displays Only if Service Interval was Changed When this feature is selected the current accumulated service distance can be reset to the newly selected service interval Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Low Fuel Chime When this feature is selected a chime will sound when the Low Fuel Indicator Light is displayed in the instrument panel cluster Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Mini Trip Computer This feature located in the overhead console displays information on outside temperature compass direction and trip information Reset Button Use this button to reset the Average Economy Trip Miles and Time Elapsed dis
182. h both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maxi mum traction When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface slight application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum trac tion WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differen tial never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle PARKING BRAKE To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instru ment cluster will light NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle 246 STARTING AND OPERATING Se To release the parking brake pull up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely Before leaving the vehicle parked on a hill you must make sure the parking brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the P Park position Make certain the transfer case is in gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P Park other wise the load
183. he shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size mmmm eeC THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat aa b j E 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Latch P
184. he vehicle Electronic Vehicle Information Center The electronic vehicle information center EVIC when the appropriate conditions exist displays the following messages and symbols Each message is accompanied by e a series of beeps e DRIVER DOOR OPEN e PASSENGER DOOR OPEN e N DOORS OPEN N 2 3 4 e RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN e REARGATE OPEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN LIFTGLASS OPEN TURN SIGNAL ON with graphic PERFORM SERVICE WASHER FLUID LOW REMOTE KEY BATTERY LOW NO J1850 BUS MSGS RECEIVED LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE SPARE LOW PRESSURE CHECK TPM SYSTEM 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Customer Programmable Features Press the MENU button until one of the display choices following appears Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip computer functions Press the STEP button while in this display to select English Francais Deutsch Italiana or Espanol As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language Display U S or Metric Pressing the STEP button when in this display selects US or Metric The overhead console and instrument panel displays will be in the selected units Auto Door Locks When this feature is selected all doors and the swing gate will lock automatical
185. heir seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reacti vated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position The manufacturer does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACCESSORY RUN posi tion engine does not need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti ES vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Wa
186. hen a low washer fluid condition is detected the VF display will show the word LOWASH and then show the odometer trip odometer mileage each for 2 seconds The display will continue to cycle If any other active warnings including door GATE or GLASS are present they will be shown in the VF display and will continue to cycle If the vehicle starts moving two single chimes will occur one chime for each complete display cycle After this the display will continue to sequence After fifteen LOWASH se quences the VF display will no longer provide this warning If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage Once the warning is removed from the display it will not return for the duration of the ignition cycle If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper moto
187. hes the side of the tape to be played CD Player Single Disc in Radio Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode CD Player 6 Disc in Cargo Area Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch will cause the CD changer to play the next available disc in the 6 disc magazine CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition take the following precautions 1 Do not use cassette tapes longer than C 90 otherwise sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin ished 2 Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from slackness and dust when it is
188. ible install the restraints using the vehicle s seat belts 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Latch Anchorages ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters o
189. icant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology Engine Oil 2 4L and 3 7L Engines Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Use API Certified SAE 0W 40 Mobil 19 Synthetic Engine Oil that meets API Categories SL CF and the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Stan dard MS 10725 If SAE 0W 40 is not available SAE 5W 40 Mobil 1 Synthetic Engine Oil is acceptable Mopar Oil Filter P N 4105409 or 4105409AB Oil Filter 3 7L Engine Mopar Oil Filter P N 4781452AA or 4781452BB Oil Filter 2 8L Diesel Engine Mopar Oil Filter P N 05072720A A Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com artment Fuel Selection Gasoline Engines 87 Octane 89 Octane should be used for trailer towing purposes 3 7L Only Only Engine Oil 2 8L Diesel Engines Oil Filter 2 4L Engine 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Mopar Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent meeting the re quirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Axle Differential Front Mopar Gear amp Axle Lubri
190. iesel Engines R32 Half ISO Re Wiper Hi Lo umm lay avity Fuse Description R33 FullSORe H Blower Fl 40 Amp Blower Motor lay Green R34 FullSORe Rad Fan Hi F2 40 Amp Radiator Fan lay Green R35 Half ISO Re A C Clutch F3 50 Amp Red JB Power lay FA 40 Amp ABS Pump R36 Open ona 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Cavity Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Description F5 Open F18 Open F6 30 Amp Pink ASD F19 30 Amp Pink Rear Window Defogger F7 50 Amp Red JB Power HBL F8 40 Amp Ign Start F20 Open Green F21 20 Amp Yel A C Clutch F9 50 Amp Red JB Power low F10 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow F22 Open F11 20 Amp Yel Fuel Heater F23 Open low F24 Open F12 30 Amp Pink Light Bar F25 20 Amp Yel ABS Valves F13 40 Amp Windows low Green F26 25 Amp Injectors F14 40 Amp Ignition Switch Natural Green F27 Open F15 50 Amp Red JB Power F28 15 Amp Blue Starter F16 15 Amp Blue ASD Feed R29 Half ISO Re Fuel Heater F17 Open lay EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 Cavity Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Description R30 Half ISO Re Starter R39 Full ISO Re ASD lay lay R31 Half ISO Re Wiper On Off R40 Full ISO Re Rad Fan Lo lay lay R 32 Ps ISO Re Wiper Hi Lo VEHICLE STORAGE R33 Full ISO Re H Blower If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 lay days you may want to take steps to protect y
191. ificantly different tire placard pressures the placard pressure value and the low pressure threshold value is re programmable at your authorized dealer to accommo date the customer selected wheel tire combinations rec ommended by DaimlerChrysler The following warnings will cause a text message to be displayed an audible chime to sound and the tire pres sure Indicator Lamp to illuminate The audible chime will occur once every ignition cycle for each warning detected The tire pressure Indicator Lamp will illumi nate continuously solid and shall remain illuminated until the warning condition is removed reset 272 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN NOTE The Indicator Lamp will only illuminate for the four active road tires A low spare tire pressure will not cause the Indicator Lamp to illuminate When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages LEFT FRONT LEFT REAR RIGHT FRONT RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE SPARE LOW PRESSURE One or more of these messages will be displayed in the EVIC if a low tire pressure condition exists in one or more tires Inspect all tires for proper inflation pressure once the proper tire pressure has been set the TPM system warning will reset automatically when the vehicle has been driven for at least 2 minutes at or above 15 mph 24 km h CHECK TPM SYSTEM See your authorized dealer when this message appears in the EVIC Th
192. ill restore original operation NOTE The Light Flash can be enabled or disabled within 23 50 feet 7 15 meters of the vehicle by per forming the following procedure 1 Press and hold the Lock button on the transmitter 2 Continue to hold the Lock button wait at least 4 but no longer than 10 seconds then press the Rear Release button 3 Release both buttons 4 Repeating steps 1 3 will restore original transmitter operation To Lock the Doors Press and release the Lock button once to lock the doors swing gate flip up window and swing gate The horn will chirp and the park lights will flash once to acknowledge the lock signal NOTE The horn chirp can be enabled or disabled within 23 50 feet 7 15 meters of the vehicle by the following procedure 1 Press and hold the Lock button on the transmitter 2 Continue to hold the Lock button wait at least 4 but no longer than 10 seconds then press the Unlock button 3 Release both buttons 4 Repeating steps 1 3 will restore original transmitter operation To Unlatch the Swing Gate Flip Up Window Press the Rear Release button twice to unlatch the swing gate flip up window ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WARNING To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass will automatically rise NOTE The transmitter can be programmed to unlatch the flip up window immediately upon activation of the Rear Release but
193. in KR5S120123 Ca ada scs vo sepe caches es 2671 5120123 e The TPM system should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE CHAINS CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacture Tire chains that are recommended for this vehicle are listed below e Mopar P N 82206828 with P235 70R16 and P235 65R17 tires e Mopar P N 82207074 with P215 75R16 tires NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period
194. in the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 Change Engine Oil minutes after a fully warmed engine has been shut off or Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the before starting the engine after it has sat overnight interval at which your oil should be changed Check the Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will M E ME improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C the oil level between the ADD and SAFE markings on the dipstick Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the reading is at the ADD mark will result ina SAFE reading e Extensive engine idling on these engines e Stop and go driving e Driving in dusty conditions CAUTION e Short trip drivi
195. ine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into P Park remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the transmission shift lever is locked in the P Park position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Further more you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle 232 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P Park position e When shifting into P Park depress the button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward until it stops Look at the shift indicator window on the console to ensure it is in the P Park position When engaged in P Park you will not be able to move the shifter rearward without depressing the shift lever button CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of P Park you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise damage to the steering column or shifter could result R Reverse For moving the vehicle rearward Always stop before moving the lever to R Reverse except when rocking the vehicle N Neutral Engine may be started in this position NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or otherwise driv ing with the transmission in N Neutral can cause severe damage to the transmission W
196. ing The gate will stay locked until the wiper is turned off and the gate is unlocked by key lock switch or key fob Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radia tor antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Window Defroster KA On the top of the climate control panel is a push button for rear window defrosting An amber indicator in the push button will light when the defroster is turned on Push again to turn off the defroster prior to an automatic time out The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten minutes For about five more minutes of operation push the button again To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating The push button also activates the heated exterior mirrors if so equipped CAUTION Use care when washing the inside of the rear win dow to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements 813d6476 Rear Defroster Switch
197. intenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Always wash hands after handling the battery DARKENED INDICATOR WITH GREEN DOT BATTERY CHARGE OK FLUID LEVEL OK DARKENED INDICATOR NO GREEN DOT BATTERY CHARGE LOW BATTERY FLUID LEVEL OK CONDITION INDICATOR YELLOW OR BRIGHT INDICATOR BATTERY CHARGE UNKNOWN FLUID LEVEL LOW CHARGE MAY STILL BE SUFFICIENT TO START YOUR CAR 8000cbce To determine the battery charge check the battery test indicator if equipped on top of the battery Refer to the illustration ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 CAUTION WARNING It is essential when replacing the cables on the e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants battery that the positive cable is attached to the approved by the manufacturer for your air condi positive post and the negative cable is attached to the tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are negative post Battery posts are marked positive flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer and negative and identified on the battery case Also if a fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to batte
198. international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing e Even though the system is designed for users speaking number combinations may not be supported in North American English and Spanish accents the system may not always work for some e dry weather condition Far End Audio Performance e When navigating through an automated system such E C MM E as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of e low to medium blower setting speaking the digit string make sure to say send e low to medium vehicle speed e Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in Rice e low road noise motion is recommended 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e smooth road surface fully closed windows and e dry weather condition e Operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loud ness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to occasionally loose connection to the UConnect system When this hap pens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recom mended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Reset In rare instances it may be necessary to reset the UCon nect system The reset feature is exercised by pressing an
199. ion 0000050 203 Tachometer 12 cp saw oS ag eee CRAS 168 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 171 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 67 Theft System Arming llle 30 Theft System Disarming llle 31 Tie Down Hooks Cargo lessen 152 Tilt Steering Column Ting Bele 1 ee im RR edo Ene edi pons 319 Tire and Loading Information Placard 258 259 Tire Identification Number TIN 257 Tire Markings im xe Re eR ERIS 254 Tire Safety Information 00 254 TICES 2 45 ba eee inbati Beebe ea eid 69b 262 Aur Pressure csc bea e ew eS ERA GRE EO 263 Alignment and Balance 267 Chains ida Re pesa e 9a Sale bas 274 CHANGING abc ited adi d mem em e heme 294 General Information llle 262 High Speed ereraa breed er e eps 264 Inflation Pressures llle 263 Jacking asada eh deri eR er eere etg 294 Load Capacity 0 000 000 iss 258 259 Pressure Monitor System sss 268 Radial 22 te ta EC PUE EACUS 265 Replacement oii xkeegudee dera bk bea ans 266 Rotatoti 2 221 Sup dog E Dea dk d Gd Ge Ea i 275 ALCL usse ux PERI NUN EROS Greene 75 254 SIZES i354 ba GOD GGRRS EG POP ARN RE oe Has 255 Spare De sessa RR CES Eat Ru RU RN 295 SPINNE ave aves i cere ME Sed WAR RR 265 Tread Wear Indicators 0 0005 266 Torque Converter Clutch 004 235 Tow Hooks Emergency see
200. ion To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The phone pairing is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA Canada and 060 for Mexico The number called may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does sli
201. ion control lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light flashes at a very fast rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator is defective 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 2 miles 3 2 km Lights On Reminder A chime will sound if the driver s door is left open and the headlights or parking lights are left on Battery Saver Feature Exterior Lights If the park lights headlights fog lights or high beams are left on when the ignition switch is in the OFF position the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the exterior lights after eight minutes Normal operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or when the switch is turned to another position Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is in the multi function control lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the park or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever The Fog Light Indicator Light will illuminate when the fog lights are on NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the park lights or the headlights o
202. ious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for a extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode when driving with any windows open even if only slightly to help keep fresh air circulating inside ve hicle Otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into the vehicle Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing pretensioners etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the be
203. ipped Outside Mirrors Power Remote Control Outside Mirrors If Equipped Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped lll Hands Free Communication UConnect I Equipped unda cut wees eta d sabe a eed 85 Operation 3s rye rey de bag y s 87 Phone Call Features llle 93 UConnect System Features 96 Advanced Phone Connectivity 100 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System isses eee e 102 Ecc Rm 108 Front Seat Manual Adjustment 108 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Front Seat Adjustment Recline 109 Passing Light 44 24r rx arr pami tai 119 Head Restraints 0 002 000 0050 110 T rti Signals sca cioe ate a nce pts dra e ect 119 Power Seat Adjuster If Equipped 111 Lights On Reminder 120 Heated Seats If Equipped 112 Battery Saver Feature Exterior Lights 120 65 35 Split Folding Rear Seat 113 Fog Lights If Equipped 120 ll To Open And Close The Hood 116 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 120 Ba lipht 2 Rl REIR RR 117 Light Bar If Eq
204. is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to section Add Names to Your UCon nect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phonebook The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that langu
205. is message indicates that a system fault condition has been detected CAUTION The TPM system has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPM system pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sen sor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPM system as damage to the sensors may result en STARTING AND OPERATING 273 General Information PET This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent following conditions moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem e This device may not cause harmful interference which could damage the wheel rim sensor e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op NOTE f eration e The TPM system can inform the driver of a low tire pressure condition The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses e The TPM system is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire fs wee condition United States oore nisseno apa
206. is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free system In the event of leakage or other malfunction the system must be replaced Manual Transmission Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended manual trans mission fluid refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the lubricant has become contaminated with water If con taminated with water the fluid should be changed im mediately Transfer Case Fluid Level Check Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is evident the transfer case fluid level can be checked by removing the fill plug B located at the back of the transfer case The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole A when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid Only at filler hole until fluid runs ou
207. ition at all times on any given road surface including dry hard surfaced roads The 4 FULL TIME mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds which eliminates driveline binding and component wear that is normally associated with driving the vehicle in the 4 PART TIME position on dry hard surfaced roads This feature provides the safety security and convenience of operating in 4 wheel drive at all times regardless of road conditions When additional traction is required the 4 PART TIME and 4LO positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together through the transfer case inter axle differential and force the front and rear driveshafts to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to these positions The 4 PART TIME and 4LO positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4 PART TIME and 4LO positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to driveline components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 The PART TIME indicator light located on the instru CAUTION ment cluster illuminates when the transfer case is shifted to the 4 PART TIME position e Do not attempt to make a shift while only the The FULL TIME indicator light located on the instru front or rear wheels are spinning The Selec Trac ment cluster illuminates when the transfer case is shifted transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer to the
208. ke is applied It does not show the degree of brake application If the parking brake is off and the light remains on have the brake system inspected as soon as possible 19 Full Time Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in FULL the FULL TIME four wheel drive mode and TIME employs the inter axle differential which al lows the front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds See page 236 for more information 20 Sentry KeylSecurity Alarm Indicator Light If Equipped Refer to Sentry Key Immobilizer System or Vehicle Security Alarm in Section 2 of this manual for more information 21 Fuel Gage When the ignition key is in the ON position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank A small arrow indicates the side of the vehicle where the filler cap gas cap is located 22 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 3 U S Gallons 8 7 Liters this light will come on and remain on until fuel is added The Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again especially during and after hard braking accelerations or turns This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank Also a single chime will sound 23 Airbag Warning Light AIR This indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 BAG seconds when the ignition is first turned on If the light doesn t come on stays on or comes on while driving have the airbag sys
209. keeping is accurately maintained Clock Setting Procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position and press the time button Using the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object press either the hour H or minute M buttons on the radio 2 Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set minutes The time setting will increase each time you press a button E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the
210. ker s Package If Equipped In the center console there are two cup holders for the With the optional Smoker s package a removable ash front seat passengers tray is inserted into the front cup holder location The rear passengers have access to a cup holder on each rear door trim panel Front Cup Holders NOTE The front cup holder insert is removable from the console for cleaning Rear Cup Holders ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light The cargo area light is activated by opening the swing gate opening any door or by rotating the dimmer control on the multi function control lever to the extreme top position If all doors are closed and only the swing gate is open pushing on the cargo light lens surface will turn off all interior lights Push on the lens surface a second time to restore the interior lights to normal operation Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped To cover the cargo area 1 Grasp the center portion of the cover flap Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover 3 The swing gate may be opened or closed with the cargo cover in place Rear Cargo Cover 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store
211. ks WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged Child Lock Control ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or open the swing gate flip up window from distances of 23 50 feet 7 15 meters using a transmitter You don t have to point the transmitter at the vehicle to activate the system Each vehicle comes with two transmitters 8159413b Four Button Transmitter To Unlock the Doors Press and release the Unlock button once to unlock the driver s door Press the button again within 5 seconds to unlock all the doors If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated Entry the interior lights also come on and remain on for about 30 seconds when you unlock the doors The park lights will flash twice to acknowledge the unlock signal NOTE The transmitter can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first press of the Unlock button within 23 50 feet 7 15 meters of the vehicle by per forming the following procedure 1 Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter 2 Continue to hold the Unlock button wait at least 4 but no longer than 10 seconds then press the Lock button 3 Release both buttons 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Repeating steps 1 3 w
212. lack in the belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck To lower the shoulder belt height push the button and slide the height adjuster down To raise the height of the shoulder belt slide the height adjuster up Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front or outboard rear seating position if equipped Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the r
213. language number of English Espanol Prompts phone to or Francais on off Say 4 digit System Lists select pin code Phones Say Priority number of List Phones phone to delete New phone will Start Pairing procedure on phone See phone s owner manual System System Lists temporarily Enter Nameofphone Mamea Enter Nameofphone EE ye phone priorities Assign Priority of phone 1 to 7 1 having highest priority All Phones Deleted Pairing Complete Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 815a5401 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M North American English SEATS Primary Alternate s Front Seat Manual Adjustment Zero Oh Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment Add location Add new bar Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near All All of them the floor Position the seat and be sure the latch engages Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts fully Delete a name Delete Language Select language List names List all List paired phones List phones Pager Beeper Phone pairing Pairing Phonebook Phone book Return to main menu Return Main menu Select phone select Set up Phone settings phone set up Manual Seat Adjustment N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the Front Seat Adjustment Recline seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched
214. lapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immedi ately if there is any evidence of degradation that could cause failure Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the appropriate Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for suggested service intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake and Power Steering System Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses for evidence of heat and me chanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling suggest deteriora tion of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Often fluids such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings There
215. late 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click s A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Latch Plate To Buckle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too BA tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snu
216. leaving the vehicle unattended When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Power Door Locks If Equipped If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the A door lock switch is on each front door panel Press this ignition switch and the driver s door is open the doors switch to lock or unlock the doors will not lock The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle until you pull up the lock plungers Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically if 1 all doors are closed 2 vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 3 and the accelerator pedal is depressed This will occur only once will not reoccur until a door is opened Power Door Lock Switch If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Child Protection Locks The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with child protection locks If you push up on the lever on the open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside of the vehicle Push the lever down to disengage the child protection loc
217. lt NOTE The Seat Belt Indicator Light will remain on until the driver s seat belt is buckled Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned on If the bulb is not lit during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Defrosters Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should feel the air directed against the windshield Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected immediately Information Provided by DEALER UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors 0 e RR IR Inside Day Night Mirror Inside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equ
218. luminated Entry lille 19 Inflation Pressure Tires llle 263 Information Center Vehicle 131 Inside Rearview Mirror sess 81 Instrument Cluster 0 0 00 00 ce eeee 166 Instrument Panel and Controls 165 Interior Appearance Care 040 340 Interior Fuses secretaria en le ee ea 342 Interior Lighting i RR 117 Interior Lights 2 aenea casas ae e Pa 117 Intermittent Wipers cececeticccie sians is ss 125 Introduction sss ER Rs RR RR 4 Jack Locatiori vu uie site ede rr poer e ME a G 295 Jack Operation 4 2 40 d ase bene tes 294 296 Jacking Instructions 000004 296 Jump Starting 300200209296 RER n p eben 299 Key Programming nsec i tacada iaa are a e 18 Key Release Button 00 000020 u 15 Key Replacement llle es 17 Key Sentry i ccs o n enue crni amras 16 Key In Reminder ises ma ipen erua ca enea ei 16 Keyless Entry System enei gE onani 25 KeyS pied ir g E E a E d dr ebat d adu d 14 Lane Change and Turn Signals 168 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0 000 38 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 67 68 Lead Free Gasoline 2 00002 eae 276 Light Bar 22264299 Rees t rat oii 121 354 Lights 5i aire rrr wig oh RH deg pen 117 350 AnG Loek ub doe cR c P e ua S 170 BackUp ers s bep P erti RD AS 355 Battery Saver xe RR e RE ae ae 120 Brake Warning seseo pt es
219. lush for child seats and or passengers An improperly with the seatback when the seat is fully latched latched seat could cause serious injury NOTE If the rear seatback is not fully latched the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt please make sure your seatback is fully latched 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Then reach under the hood and slide the safety latch to To open the hood two latches must be released First pull the right and lift the hood the hood release lever inside your vehicle located under the left side of the instrument panel 81464e04 Underhood Safety Latch To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 12 inches 30 cm and then push hood closed This should Hood Release Lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before driving LIGHTS Interior Lights The overhead lights will come on when a door is opened and when the rotating ring on the multi function control lever is in a position other than OFF They may also be turned on by rota
220. ly when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 25 km h Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Auto Unlock On Exit Available Only When the AUTO DOOR LOCKS Feature is Turned On When this feature is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park or N Neu tral position Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When this feature is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors and swing gate When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors and the swing gate will unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select DRIVER S DOOR 1ST or EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 ALL DOORS This can also be programmed using the key fob refer to Remote Keyless Entry earlier in this section Train Remote Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No NOTE Any time you perform this procedure it is necessary to retrain all currently trained key fobs To Train Additional Key Fobs using the EVIC module 1 Press the MENU button until TRAIN REMOTE NO is displayed Press the STEP button to change t
221. m the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 280 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Carbon Monoxide Warnings the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side WARNING windows fully open e Keep the swing gate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning FUEL REQUIREMENTS DIESEL ENGINES e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill For most year round service No 2 diesel fuel meeting Never run the engine in a closed area such as a ASTM specification D 975 will provide good perfor garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the mance If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold below engine running for an extended period If the vehicleis 20 F or 7 C or is required to operate at colder than stopped in an open area with the engine running for normal conditions for prolonged periods use climatized more than a short period adjust the ventilation system No 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No 2 diesel fuel with 50
222. mage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury 302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES BEEN TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 2WD Models Only Provided the transmission is operable tow only in N Neutral at speeds not exceeding 30 mph 48 km h for distances of not more than 15 miles 24 km Towing at more than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 15 miles 24 km can cause severe transmission damage If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km tow with all four wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly Removing the driveshaft for towing is not recommended since this can allow fluid to drain from the transmission 4WD Models Only The manufacturer recommends towing with all four wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B dL Engine seyrini usd nera poner 306 Nl EOS Rsccsk xao 055 Ee ee 307 B 2 8L Turbo Diesel Engine 0 308 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 309 Loose Fuel Filler Cap
223. miles per gallon MPG or liters per 100 km L 100 km since the last reset Miles To Empty Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled before the fuel gauge shows E Empty The distance is calcu lated by multiplying the amount of fuel remaining by the projected fuel economy The distance predicted will change every few seconds to a higher or lower number as these factors change This display cannot be reset Trip Miles Shows the distance traveled since the last reset Time Elapsed Shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset Miles To Service Shows the amount of miles remaining until service is required owner selected ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Tire PSI Shows the pressure and location of each tire except for the spare tire The tire location will blink when under pressure Blank Screen Shows a blank screen Pressing the C T button returns to the Compass and Temperature display Pressing the STEP button returns you to the Average Miles per Gallon display Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually set the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will be displayed After completing three 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects the CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass a
224. n be positioned at any detent Mode Selection The mode selector the center rotary knob and the push button above it can be set in any of the following positions x Press this button to turn on and off the air condi tioning Conditioned outside air is then directed through the outlets selected on the mode control dial The button includes an LED that illuminates when pressed OFF This position turns off the blower motor and outside air will not pass through any outlets Recirculate Max AIC Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Allows for circulation of interior air only which will cool the cabin faster This setting can be used in very hot weather to maximize the effect of the air conditioner This mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust Slight airflow from the floor outlets and the defrost outlets located at the base of the windshield may be noticed Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Slight airflow from the defrost outlet located at the base of the windshield may be noticed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Bi Level J Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel on the floor and in the rear of the center console Slight airflow from the defrost outlet located at the base of the windshield may be noticed Floor 3 Air flows through the floor outlets located under the i
225. n low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the engine has started They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off when the headlights are switched on or when the parking brake is set ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Light Bar If Equipped CAUTION 1 Remove lamp covers by pressing the thumb tab up The auxiliary lights mounted on the off road light wards and pulling the cover off bar should be illuminated during OFF ROAD USE ONLY Having them illuminated on public streets highways roads etc may be illegal in your state Your state may also require auxiliary lights be cov LAMP COVERS ered when operating your vehicle on the public streets highways roads etc Further illuminating these lights with the supplied covers installed could cause permanent damage to the light bar Before using these auxiliary lights contact your State Au thorities for proper operation and use of these lights Light Bar 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 With the ignition in the ON position press the button An indicator light in the instrument cluster will illumi to turn on the light bar located on the instrument panel nate when the light bar has been activated to the left of the steering column Press the button again to turn off the light bar To reinstall lamp c
226. n the ignition key to the ON RUN position 2 Watch the Glow Plug Indicator Light It will stay on for a maximum of 2 seconds depending on engine temperature When the Glow Plug Indicator Light goes out the engine is ready to start 3 Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition key to START and hold it in this position until the engine starts Starting and Operating Cautions Diesel Engines e Under normal conditions do not operate the starter for longer than 20 seconds at one time At tempera tures below 5 F 15 C you may operate the starter for up to 25 seconds at one time Longer periods of operation may result in starter or battery damage If the engine does not start at once repeat Steps 1 through 4 e Cold engine speeds higher than necessary for driving or higher than specified for idling may damage engine components e Before turning off your Diesel engine always allow the engine to return to normal idle speed and then run for several seconds This assures proper lubrication of the turbocharger This is particularly necessary after periods of high speed driving 224 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Turbocharger Cool Down sufficiently cool down the turbocharger before shut NOTE Letting the engine idle after extended operation cow Cape ding Upon ihe peak using and Aie amount of cargo allows the turbine housing to cool to normal operating temperature The following chart should be us
227. n the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then lift the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not n
228. nd replace your engine coolant anti freeze every 102 000 miles 163 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 364 SCHEDULE B GASOLINE ENGINES ME Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluidt X Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 Kilometers 5 000 10 000 14 000 19 000 24 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings X E SCHEDULE B GASOLINE ENGINES 365 Miles 18 000 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 Kilometers 29 000 34 000 38 000 43 000 48 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Replace the spark plugs X Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary gt X Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluidt X Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L
229. nd burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot antifreeze coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check antifreeze coolant protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If antifreeze coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh antifreeze coolant Check the front of the A C condenser if
230. nd follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace your engine coolant anti freeze every 102 000 miles 163 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule B Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched ule B Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 362 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se At Each Stop for Fuel e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully operation warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil levelwhile At Each Oil Change the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Inspect the exhaust system e Change the engine oil filter e Check the windshield washer solvent add as required e Inspect brake hoses Once a Month e Check the engine coolant anti freeze level hoses and
231. ndom Play RND Press the Random button to play the tracks on the selected disc in random order for an interesting change of pace Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second time or by ejecting the CD from the changer Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual CD Diagnostic Indicators When driving over a very rough road the CD player may skip momentarily Skipping will not damage the disc or the player and play will resume automatically As a safeguard and to protect your CD player one of the following warning symbols may appear on your display A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 CD HOT will pause the operation Play can be resumed when the operating temperature is corrected or another MODE is selected An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons e Excessive vibration 6 DISC CHANGER e Disc inserted upside down ANENE e Damaged disc e Water condensation on optics 813ebacd SALES CODE RBQ AM FM STEREO RADIO RBQ Radio WITH 6 DISC CD CHANGER Radio Operation NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower left Power Volume Control side of your radio faceplate Press the PWR VOL control to t
232. nformation on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing 284 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Perform maintenance services as prescribed in the Maintenance Schedules section When your vehicle is used for trailer towing never exceed the gross axle weight rating GAWR by the addition of e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle Remember that everything put in or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Warranty Requirements The manufacturer s warranty will apply to vehicles used to tow trailers for noncommercial use however the following conditions must be met e The D Overdrive range can be selected when tow ing However if frequent shifting occurs select the O D Off function or move the shift lever to the next lower position to eliminate excessive automatic trans mission shifting This action will also reduce the possibility of transmission overheating and provide better engine braking Refer to Transmission Shift ing in this section for additional information e A load equalizing hitch is recommended for loaded trailer weights above 1 000 Ibs 454 kg EE
233. ng of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high 1 Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine e Taxi Police or delivery service commercial service e Trailer towing e Off road or desert driving 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown in schedule B of the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A of the Main tenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection Gasoline Engines For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity 2 4L and 3 7L Engines SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temp
234. ng retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CH ildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child re
235. ngine Oil soss depe eraa eae 314 315 Warning Flasher Hazard 292 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 168 Warnings and Cautions assau aasa 7 Warranty Information saes daa hea e 393 Washer Adding Fluid osese cscaciras scarita 157 Washers Windshield 124 324 Washing Vehicle 3 0 6 cse meg 338 Waxing and Polishing 00 338 Wheel Alignment and Balance 267 Wheel Mounting 4 eid hr e tetes 298 en INDEX 417 Wind Buffeting edu eR edes licei eg 36 Window Fogging sese 214 Windows xisesexc ak Rx Ras CERTE eee RS 35 POWER acs book ore uh a m NE MENU MN Vu 35 Windshield Washers llle 124 Fluid 2244 iebpe e XR REPETIT 324 Windshield Wiper Blades 323 Windshield Wipers 0 0 00 0 00 eee eee 125 Wipers Intermittent 0 0000 meta 125 NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES
236. nhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and is spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer strongly supports the use of reformu lated gasoline Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing METHANOL Gasoline containing methanol may damage critical fuel system components MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The man
237. nition OFF the display will show the time of day for about 5 seconds then go out If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 LOAD EJT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded After the radio displays load insert the CD into the player Radio display will show loading when it is being loaded LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show ejecting when it is being ejected If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will return to the last selected AM or FM mode The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF Seek Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the bottom of the button
238. ns such as deep snow mud or sand 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ME where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L or 4LO range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam age to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting en STARTING AND OPERATING
239. nsfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause in transfer case N Neutral NOTE To shift from 4H to 4L the shift lever should pushed away from the driver and then rearward into 4L In 4H there is a neutral stop to prevent shifting into N Neutral by accident NOTE Pausing in transfer case N Neutral in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift If difficulty occurs shift automatic transmission to N Neutral hold foot on brake and turn engine OFF Make shift to the desired mode 240 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may oc cur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The pre ferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Selec Trac Operating Information Precautions If Equipped The Selec Trac transfer case provides 5 mode positions normal 2 wheel drive mode part time 4 wheel drive high range full time 4 wheel drive high range neutral and 4 wheel drive low range This transfer case is equipped with an inter axle differ ential which allows driving the vehicle in the 4 FULL TIME pos
240. nsmission in P Park or manual transmission in R Reverse Turn OFF the ignition WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions 1 Remove spare tire 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket As semble the tools by connecting the driver to the exten sion and then to the lug wrench EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front tires place it in the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be changed For the rear tires place it under the axle by the wheel to be changed Position the jack handle on the jack Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stabilit
241. nstrument panel and through the outlets lo cated in the rear of the center console Slight airflow from the defrost outlet located at the base of the windshield may be noticed The air conditioning system has been enabled in Floor mode to provide less humid air espe cially when heat is used This will help you reduce or prevent window fogging in high humidity conditions This function cannot be disabled You may still select the desired amount of heat using the temperature control dial The heated air will simply be drier and less prone to condensing on cold window surfaces b 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Mix te Air flows through the floor outlets the outlets at the base of the windshield and the side window demisters outlets Defrost S Air flows through the outlets at the base of the windshield and through the side window demister outlets Operating Tips Fast Cool Down For a fast cool down turn the blower fan rotary knob to the extreme clockwise position turn the mode selector to the panel position and drive with the windows open for the first few minutes Once the hot air has been expelled close the windows and turn the mode selector to Max A C Recirculation When a comfortable condition has been reached choose a mode position and adjust the temperature control knob and blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort For high humidity conditions it may be necessary to remain in the Max A C Recir
242. ntrol of the vehicle e The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the window bags to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the window bag The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates This especially applies to chil dren The window bag is only about 32 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e The Occupant Classification System OCS will clas sify an occupant in the front passenger seat into a size category based on sensor readings from within the seat cushion Occupants should try to remain in a normally seated position If the occupant s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle i e feet on the dashboard the OCS may not be able to properly approximate occupant size Furthermore the occupant size may appear to in
243. o YES Then PRESS A VALID FOB KEY will be displayed Press either the Lock or Unlock button on the current key fob 2 The next display will say PRESS FOB 2 LOCK amp UNLOCK Press both key fob buttons simultaneously 3 The next display will say PRESS FOB 2 UNLOCK Press the unlock button on the second key fob 4 The next display will say FOB 2 TRAINED At this point the procedure can be exited by pressing the STEP RESET or C T button 5 Repeat step 2 4 to train additional key fobs A total of four key fobs can be programmed Can also be programmed using the key fob refer to Remote Keyless Entry earlier in this section Sound Horn On Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Can also be programmed using the key fob refer to Remote Keyless Entry earlier in this section 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Flash Lights With Locks When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Can also be pro
244. of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 2 4L 3 7L Engines Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed 2 8L Turbo Diesel Engines Rotate the tires every 6 000 miles 10 000 km NOTE The Premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will m automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the corre
245. ol Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defrost Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights turn on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights When the ignition is turned off the light will turn off automatically after approximately 8 minutes Lighted Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Extension If Equipped This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for increased coverage es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UCon nect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher For UConnect Customer Support call 1 877 855 8400 or visit the UConnect website www chrysler com uconnect UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system
246. oline Engines center also contains Mini fuses and plug in full and Cavity Fuse Description micro ISO relays A label inside the latching cover of the F1 40 Amp Blower Motor center identifies each component for ease of replacement Green if necessary Cartridge fuses and relays can be obtained F2 40 Amp Radiator Fan from your authorized dealer Green 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Description F3 50 Amp Red JB Power F15 50 Amp Red JB Power F4 40 Amp ABS Pump F16 Open Green F17 Open F5 20 Amp Yel NGC Trans F18 Open low F19 30 Amp Pink Rear Window Defogger F6 30 Amp Pink ASD HBL F7 50 Amp Red B Power F20 Open F8 40 Amp Ign Start F21 20 Amp Yel A C Clutch Green low F9 50 Amp Red JB Power F22 Open F10 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow F23 Open Fil Open F24 20 Amp Yel Fuel Pump F12 30 Amp Pink Light Bar low F13 40 Amp Windows F25 20 Amp Yel ABS Valves Green low F14 40 Amp Ignition Switch F26 25 Amp Injectors Green Natural EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 Cavity Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Description F27 Open R37 Half ISO Re NGC Trans F28 15 Amp Blue Starter lay R29 Half ISO Re Fuel Pump R38 Open lay R39 Full ISO Re ASD R30 Half ISO Re Starter lay lay R40 Full ISO Re Rad Fan Lo R31 Half ISO Re Wiper On Off lay lay Power Distribution Center D
247. on of this manual SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ci 4N109268 J This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 260 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ib 5 Determine the combin
248. on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of P Park WARNING e Leaving children unattended in a vehicle is dan gerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the gear selector lever Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving Failure to do so can lead to brake failure NOTE Parking brake adjustment and maintenance should be performed by your authorized dealer EN STARTING AND OPERATING 247 ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Anti Lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate com puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self
249. onds immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a bulb check Afterwards if the bulb remains on this indicates a malfunction in the electronics If the bulb begins to flash immediately after the ignition switch is turned on this indicates that an invalid key is being used to start the vehicle Both of these conditions will result in the engine being shut down after 2 seconds of running Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition for that vehicle If the Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator Light comes on during normal vehicle operation it has been running for longer than 10 seconds a fault has been detected in the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same keychain will not cause a key related Transponder fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Also cell phones pagers or other RF electron ics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed
250. one present in or near approximately with in 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete e The phone names along with priority numbers will be played e When prompted say the priority number of the cellu lar phone or All to delete all phones you wish to delete You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and say the priority number Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System Voice Recognition VR e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e Performance is maximized under e It is not recommended to store similar sounding 1 TM low to medium blower setting names in the UConnect phonebook e UConnect phonebook name tag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the e low road noise phonebook e low to medium vehicle speed e smooth road surface e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero e fully closed windows P 8 e Even though
251. onebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile or pager Say the designation you wish to delete After confirmation the phonebook entries will be de leted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries e To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE the user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call e The selected number
252. only the tire and wheel The suspension components of your vehicle should be sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle inspected and aligned when needed to obtain maximum Never use a tire smaller than the minimum tire size tire tread life listed on your vehicle s tire label Using a smaller tire could result in tire overloading and failure You could Poor suspension alignment may result in lose control and have an accident Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate e reduced tread life speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control Overloading your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure Use tires of the recommended load e vehicle pull to the right or to the left capacity for your vehicle never overload them e uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right Alignment will not correct this problem See your dealer for proper diagnosis of the problem Improper alignment will not normally cause vehicle vibration which may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Tire Pressure Monitoring Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPM system uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
253. ontrol is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM TAPE CD Etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset push button Tape Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next selection on the cassette Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second selection three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch switc
254. oor to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or by calling 1 800 355 3515 Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes To erase the programmed buttons perform the procedure shown below under When Your Vehicle Is New or for assis tance contact HomeLink at www homelink com or by calling 1 800 355 3515 When Your Vehicle Is New Prior to programming HomeLink for the first time the factory test codes must be erased To erase HomeLink memory press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons buttons one and three The message CLEARING CHANNELS will appear on the HomeLink display After approximately 20 seconds the message CHANNELS CLEARED will appear on the EVIC display Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Programming HomeLink NOTE It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being pro grammed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run the vehicle s engine while programming HomeLink
255. or recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in N Neutral before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Depress brake pedal 2 Shift transmission into N Neutral 3 Shift transfer case lever into N Neutral 4 Start engine 288 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM 5 Shift automatic transmission into D Drive or manual transmission into any forward gear 6 Release brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 7 Shut the engine OFF and place the ignition key into the unlocked OFF position 8 Shift automatic transmission into P Park or ensure manual transmission is in any forward gear 9 Apply parking brake 10 Attach vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar 11 Release parking brake CAUTION Transmission damage may occur if the automatic transmission is shifted into P Park with the transfer case in N Neutral and the engine running With the transfer case in N Neutral ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into P Park refer to steps 7 8 above Shifting Out Of Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Shift transmission into N Neutral 2 Turn engine off 3 Shift transfer case lever to desired position 4 Shift automatic transmission into P Park ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 5 Start engine CAUTION
256. or unit X X Flush and replace the engine coolant anti X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 384 SCHEDULE B DIESEL ENGINES Se Miles 68 750 75 000 81 250 87 500 93 750 100 000 Kilometers 110 000 120 000 130 000 140 000 150 000 160 000 Inspect the brake linings X X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X X Applies only if vehicle is used for frequent trailer Inspection and service should be performed anytime a towing or fleet commercial service malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all receipts t The replacement of such component is requested if there is superficial wear bearing clearance or evident grease leak M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 en SCHEDULE A DIESEL ENGINES 385 n Schedule A Diesel Engines Miles 12 500 25 000 37 500 50 000 n Kilometers 20 000 40 000 60 000 80 000 N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X 4 Inspect the engine air filter element Replace as neces X X X X C sary E Replace the engine air filter element X X S Inspect the boost pressure solenoid filter Replace as nec X X X X C essary B Replace the boost pressure solenoid filter if not previ X D ously replaced T Replace the fuel filter water separator unit X X 3 Inspect the brake linings X X S Inspect the transfer case fl
257. ounted CD changer available through Mopar Accessories The fol lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate this CD changer Mode Button To activate the CD changer press the MODE button until CD information appears on the display Disc Up Program Button 1 Press the DISC up button 1 button to play the next available disc Disc Down Program Button 5 Press the DISC down button 5 button to play the previous disc Seek Button Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the same disc A SEEK symbol will appear on the display Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons Press and hold the FF button for fast forward Press and hold the RW button for fast reverse The audio output can be heard when fast forward and fast reverse are activated 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Random Play RND Press the Random button to play the tracks on the selected disc in random order for an interesting change of pace Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second time or by ejecting the CD from the changer CD Diagnostic Indicators When driving over a very rough road the CD player may skip momentarily Skipping will not damage the disc or the player and play will resume automatically As a safeguard and to protect your CD player one of the following warning symbols may appear on your display A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot CD HOT will pause the operation Play can be resumed
258. our battery You may R34 Full ISO Re Rad Fan Hi lay e Remove Cartridge fuse 15 in the Power Distribution R35 Half ISO Re A C Clutch Center labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD lay e Store the removed IOD fuse in the Power Distribution R36 lay ISO Re Viscous Heat Center location 11 labeled IOD Storage R37 Open e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery R38 Open e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type A C Heater eeu Ges exu dean Not Serviceable Ashtray Receiver Light 161 Climate Control Manual A C 74 Front R ading z i eer oe be ea hes 192 Rear Cargo Light 05 214 2 Lighted Vanity Mirror P N 6501966 Underpanel Courtesy Lights 906 Instrument Cluster General Illumination 103 Telltale Hazard Light 0 74 Available only from authorized dealers Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lights i eee en 3157 P27 7W Center High Mounted Stoplight 921 W16W Fog Lights Sport Limited Only 9145 Fog Lights Ren
259. overs insert the tab under the top center lip of the lamp housing Rotate the cover until snap fit is aligned with notch in the bottom center of the housing Push cover until it is securely snapped flush in the housing Light Bar Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The wipers and washers are operated by a switch on the control lever This control lever is located on the right side of the steering column For front wiper operation turn the control lever end cap upward to select the desired wiper speed Windshield Wiper Washer Switch 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermit tent interval previously selected NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the overhead console all warnings including door GATE GLASS and LOWASH will only be displayed in the EVIC display not in the instrument cluster For addi tional information refer to Overhead Console If Equipped in Section 3 The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word LOWASH when the washer solvent needs to be refilled If the vehicle is not moving w
260. p indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone Note this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Select
261. par Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl or leather upholstery Mopar Vinyl Cleaner is specifically recommended for interior vinyl trim Leather Seat Care amp Cleaning Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking the leather with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean the leather Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru ments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Carpet Vacu
262. peed by 6 mph 9 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is on and set press and hold the DECEL button Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING Leaving the Speed Control on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or To Accelerate for Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE When driving uphill at elevations above 2 000 ft 610 meters or when the vehicle is heavily loaded especially when towing the vehicle may slow below the SET speed If the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the Speed Control will automatically disengage If this happens you can push down on the accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed A full throttle high RPM acceleration while the system is engaged will cause the system to disengage Vehicles may exhibit several 4 3 downshifts under the above conditions To reduce the frequency of the down shifts and to improve vehicle performance it is advisable to lock out overdrive Press the O D OFF button on the right side of the shift lever cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always turn
263. perature If the transmission gets too hot the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in D Drive position If the transmission becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP warning light in the instru ment cluster will come on After the transmission cools down it will return to normal operation Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch TCC will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving and the vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h To understand the difference in operation drive the vehicle so that TCC engagement conditions are correct and then press and release the O D OFF button once to disengage the TCC Wait a few seconds and then press and release the O D OFF button again to engage the TCC You will notice that the engine runs at a higher RPM when driving at vehicle speeds above approximately 30 mph 48 km h with the TCC
264. plays to zero This will occur only if a resettable function is currently being displayed Aver age Economy Trip Miles and Time Elapsed A single chime will sound to indicate that a reset has occurred Global Reset If the RESET button is pressed twice within 3 seconds while in any of the three resettable displays the RESET button will reset all three displays A chime two beeps will sound to indicate that a reset has occurred Menu Button Press the Menu button to scroll through the following screens LANGUAGE DISPLAY U S OR METRIC AUTO DOOR LOCKS AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT RE MOTE UNLOCK DRIV DOOR 1ST SOUND HORN WITH LOCK FLASH LIGHTS WITH LOCKS HEAD LAMP DELAY SERVICE INTV LOW FUEL CHIME and TRAIN REMOTE C T Button Press the C T button to display the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direc tion the vehicle is facing 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32 F 0 C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible per sonal injury or property damage Step Button Press the STEP button to cycle through all of the displays The displays are Average Miles GAL Miles To Empty Trip Miles Time Elapsed Miles To Service Tire PSI and Blank Screen Average Miles GAL Shows the average fuel economy in
265. ppears erratic and the CAL symbol does not appear you must manually put the compass into the Calibration mode To Put Into a Calibration Mode Turn on the ignition and set the display to Compass Temperature Press and hold the RESET button more than 10 seconds to change the display between VARI ANCE compass variance and CAL compass calibra tion modes When the CAL symbol is displayed com plete three 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal objects or power lines The CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set according to the Compass Variance Map To set the variance Turn the ignition ON and set the display to Compass Temperature Press and hold the RESET button five seconds no more than 10 seconds The last variance zone number will be displayed Press the STEP button to select the new variance zone and press the RESET button to resume normal operation COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8000cbab N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 General Information GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15 and Equipped in vehicles
266. pressure levels EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indi cator Lamp will flash on and off for ten seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset The Tire Pressure Monitoring System consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 5 Wheel Sensors e Amber Colored Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 The system will consist of tire pressure monitoring 1 sensors attached to each wheel through the valve stem EAU TION mounting hole a central receiver module and an amber The TPM system has been optimized for the original colored Indicator Lamp A sensor is located in the spare equipment tires and wheels TPM system pressures wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size have been established for the tire size equipped on spare wheel and tire assembly your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sen NOTE For vehicles with optional wheel ti
267. r passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors and swing gate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 sec onds to signal that the system is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming If the system successfully arms the Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 To Disarm the System To disarm the system you will need to press the Un lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or turn the ignition key to the RUN position If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering NOTE On vehicles equipped with Remote
268. r Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instru ment panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has window bags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller e Remote Acceleration Sensors e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Airbag e Passenger Airbag e Window Bags above Side Windows If Equipped e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Interconnecting Wiring e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification Module The e Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification System ORC will not det
269. r may occur when the vehicle is restarted Windshield Wiper Operation Turn the control lever end cap upward to the middle mark sixth detent for Low speed wiper operation or to the upper mark seventh detent for High speed opera tion Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Move the control lever to any of the first five wiper switch positions by turning the end cap of the control lever The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column push down on the lever below the turn signal control and move the wheel up or down as desired Pull the lever back towards you and firmly push the lever until it is above the lower surface of the shroud to lock the column in place Tilt Steering Column es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged this device takes over accelerator opera tions beginning at speeds of approximately 30 mph 48 km h The cont
270. ract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 393 WARRANTY INFORMATION See your manufacturer s Warranty Information Booklet for information on warranty coverage and transfer of warranty 394 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 1Yu 2Yud 3Yd 3Yr 3Yrd 5Yn T7Yr 8Yu DESCRIPTION 42 000 24 000 36 000 50 000 Unimta 100 000 70 000 80 000 asicLimisa Wanany Coverage Basic Limited Warranty Coverage DL nl 1 Special Extended Warranty Coverage Powertrain Limited Warranty 100 deductible Anti Corrosion Perforation Limited Warranty All Panels Outer Panels D EU UALLLLI Federal Emission Warranty Federal Emission Warranty a Specified Components I d bo d d California
271. re Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Milimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in 256 STARTING AND OPERATING Se EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions ie tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indi
272. re sizes and sor damage may result when using replacement significantly different tire placard pressures the placard equipment that is not of the same size type and or pressure value and the low pressure threshold value is style After market wheels can cause sensor damage re programmable at your authorized dealer to accommo Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads date the customer selected wheel tire combinations rec if your vehicle is equipped with a TPM system as ommended by DaimlerChrysler damage to the sensors may result 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the wheel rim sensor NOTE e The TPM system can inform the driver of a low tire pressure condition e The TPM system is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPM system should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPM system uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module The wheel sensors monitor tire pressure and status
273. rection 183 Fade xoc sou M T E eU net 181 Metal Tape Selection 0 183 Tone Control zar ERE 181 Pinch Roller Release llsssssne 184 AM FM Selection lesse 181 Noise Reduction 000 184 Scan BUON aac acm e RS does eee ms 181 Operating Instructions CD Player 184 To Set The Radio Push Button Memory 182 Inserting The Compact Disc 184 To Change From Clock To Radio Mode 182 Seek B ttoli issuer ene ede tita 185 Operating Instructions Tape Player 182 EJT CD Eject Button sssssssss 185 Seek Button iiie k a essi eds nes 182 FF Tune RW i 26 a RR nae 186 Fast Forward FF isle 183 Program Button 4 Random Play 186 E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 Tape CD Button 3g cu eo Time Button ssw iasa mE EUR Scan Button llle CD Changer Control Capability It Equipped ega resene RR RA lll Sales Code RBK AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player And CD Changer Controls Radio Operation coses g naiaiae aia a CD Player Operation ooe readas segin ah CD Changer Control Capability It Equipped rere px Rs ll Sales Code RBO AM FM Stereo Radio With 6 Disc CD Changer sped dinni Radio Operation ike eer nera 195 CD Player Oper
274. rivetrain damage may result FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Command Trac Operating Information Precautions The Command Trac transfer case provides 4 mode positions 2 rear wheel drive high range 4 wheel drive high range neutral and 4 wheel drive low range This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2 wheel drive position 2H for normal street and highway con ditions such as dry hard surfaced roads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237 When additional traction is required the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to these positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The PART TIME indicator light located in the instrument cluster illuminates when the transfer case is shifted to the 4H position The 4 LO MODE indicator light located in the instru ment cluster illuminates when the transfer case is shifted to the 4L position There is no light for the 2H or N Neutral positions CAUTION e Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The Command Trac transfer case is not equipped with a synchro nizer and therefore the front and rear
275. rmal operating temperature Operation of the transmission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 The vehicle must be on level ground 2 The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Fully apply parking brake 4 Apply the brakes and shift the transmission into P Park 5 The fluid MUST be checked with the transmission in P Park to be sure that the fluid level is accurate 6 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Remove dipstick and note reading At normal operating temperature approximately 180 F 82 C the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 cross hatched area on the oil level indicator The fluid level indicator should be in the COLD region at 70 F 21 C fluid temperature If the fluid level is low add sufficient fluid to bring to the proper level Refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid is added through the dipstick tube NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated Special Additives The manufacturer recommends against the addition of any additives to the transmission Exception to this policy
276. rn the key to the OFF position wait 5 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Ignition Key Positions 222 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly ee STARTING AND OPERATING 223 If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de crease as the engine warms up Normal Starting Diesel Engines 1 Tur
277. rning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Airbags DRIVER AIRBAG PASSENGER AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTER 81454550 Front Airbag Components This vehi
278. rols are mounted on the steering wheel and consist of ON OFF SET RES ACCEL CANCEL and DECEL controls RESUME ON OFF AGER CANCEL S T DECEL 8144ee64 To Activate Press and release the ON OFF button to turn the system on To turn the system off press the ON OFF button again The system should be turned off when not in use The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the system is on 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press and release the SET button Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal normal braking or pressing the CANCEL button will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the memory Pressing the ON OFF but ton or turning off the ignition erases the memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed press and release the RES ACCEL button Resume can be used at any speed beginning at approximately 30 mph 48 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Speed Control is on and set speed can be increased by pressing and holding the RES ACCEL but ton When the button is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the RES ACCEL button once will result in a 2 mph 3 km h speed increase Each time the button is tapped speed increases so tapping the button three times will increase s
279. rs the tires should be replaced Overloading your vehicle long trips in very hot weather and driving on bad roads may result in greater wear Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct inflation pressure The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in quality and performance when replacement is needed see section on tread wear indicators Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling ride and fuel economy of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment tire dealer on any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability EN STARTING AND OPERATING 267 WARNING CAUTION Do n t T WEE wheel size Onan other thatithat Replacing original tires with tires of a different size specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unap proved tires and wheels may change suspension dimen sions and performance characteristics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in Alignment and Balance may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Check with your dealer before replacing tires with a different size serious injury or death Use
280. ry Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for additional warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal Air Conditioner Maintenance injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici
281. s 220 Rocking The Vehicle 0 Normal Starting Gasoline Engines 2210 MiFour Wheel Drive Operation 236 Normal Starting Diesel Engines 223 Command Trac Operating Diesel Fuel Water Separator 0 eee 225 Information Precautions 236 Re Priming The Diesel Fuel System 225 Shift Positions s sce cese rr s da 238 Bl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 226 shifting Procedure ese RE 239 Selec Trac Operating Information Precautions B Transmission Shifting 00 227 if Equipped 240 218 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Shift Positions Nc qx ex ea n Rp REP a ERR 242 W Tire Safety Information sss 254 Shifting Procedure 000 243 Tire Markings 54e n e ee 254 Wi Trac Lok Rear Axle If Equipped 245 Tire Identification Number TIN 257 B Parking Brake sascsrrei sans pren talens has 245 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 258 Bl Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped 247 W Tires General Information 262 B On Road Driving Tips a i RR 249 Tire Inflation Pressures 14e cr e xen 263 E Off Road Driving Tips i e ene 249 High Speed Operation 264 When To Use 4L Or 4LO Low Range 249 Radial Ply Ties Loue wie weak awe 265 Driving Through Water
282. s 301 TOWING cue eek Se Poe Pe ek 283 302 Disabled Vehicle sels 302 Recreational 0 0 0 0 ce ee 287 Trailering 4iisa er RR ke cane 283 Trac Lok Rear Axle llle 245 Trailer TOWING eetere ren eic Eee e ii pas 283 Minimum Requirements 04 286 Transfer Case llle 236 336 Four Wheel Drive Operation 236 Maintenance llle 336 Transmission Automatic 416 INDEX EE Maintenance 0000 e eee eee 333 335 Manual 2 229249 xot px 3 227 MUMS esie dor d Re end Rt Back ae 227 Warning Light 05s eee m Re 172 Transmitter Battery Service llle 29 Transmitter Garage Door Opener 139 Transmitter Programming llle 28 Transporting Pets llle 72 Tread Wear Indicators 00005 266 Trip Odometer llle 171 Turbo Cool Down esses 224 T ri Signals occ eee eee ans 119 168 352 355 Underhood Fuses a s aad a aat daa 002s 345 Universal Transmitter sanasana aaaea 139 Unleaded Gasoline 00000 000s 276 Upholstery Gare eee mue abe eos 340 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Vanity Mirrors 54 0 e bee naed na OE A ea 84 Variance Compass 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 138 Vehicle Identification Number 8 Vehicle Loading 4 229 sche sabe emen 259 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Vehicle Storage 6 ee 349 Vinyl Tritt sce a ee eee a ee ee eee ee a 340 Viscosity E
283. s the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to section Toggling Between Two Calls To combine two calls refer to section Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has been placed on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described in section Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double bee
284. seat to it s mid track position belts Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold using a seat belt properly down easily 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To fold the 65 35 rear seat perform the following steps 1 Locate the seatback release handle on the outboard top side of each rear seatback lift up on the handle and rotate the lever forward until the seatback releases Fold the seatback completely forward Folding Rear Seat NOTE When lifting up on the release handle the seatback will release easier if you do not pull forward on the seatback only lift up on the release handle until the seatback disengages then fold the seat forward GS When the seatback is folded completely forward the Rear Seat Release head restraints should be flush against the seat cushion es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 To restore the 65 35 rear seat to the upright WARNING position perform the following steps Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully position If the seatback in not securely locked into locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its position the seat will not provide the proper stability proper position The seat release handle will be f
285. sh button memory press the SET button SET 1 will show in the display window Select the push button you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a station is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM stations to be locked into memory You can recall the stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push button twice To Change From Clock To Radio Mode Press the Time button to change the display between radio frequency and time Operating Instructions Tape Player Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the right and the mechanical action of the player will gently pull the cassette into the play position NOTE When subjected to extremely cold temperatures the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm up for proper operation Sometimes poor playback may be experienced due to a defective cassette tape Clean and demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year Seek Button Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the tape and down to return to the beginning of the current selection es UNDERSTANDING
286. sing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated x Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other objects Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Power Remote Control Outside Mirrors If Equipped The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver s door trim panel below the door lock switch Set the top switch to the left or right for the left or right mirror and set it to the center off position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror when you are finished adjusting the mirror Press one of the four arrows for the direction you want the mirror to move Power Mirror Switches 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Heated Remote Contr
287. straint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower at tachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regard less of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child re straints are not LATCH compat
288. t any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift If the overheating condition persists a continuous chime will sound to alert the driver Reduce the vehicle speed and or stop the vehicle while allowing the engine to idle and cool the engine The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295 Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are stored To remove the spare tire from the carrier remove the tire beneath the right rear seat To remove the jack from its cover if equipped and remove the lug nuts with the lug stowage position turn the thumb screw counterclock wrench turning them counterclockwise wise to loosen jack assembly and then remove it 80d1f789 Spare Tire Mounting E ze Jack Storage Location 296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE If you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire mounted carrier it cannot exceed a gross weight of 50 Ibs 23 kg including the weight of the spare tire Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place auto matic tra
289. t currently broad cast PTY information Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types Program Type Radio Display Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Program Type Radio Display Program Type Radio Display Country Country Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 Foreign Language Language Weather Weather News News By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is Nostalgia Nostalga displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Oldies Oldies station with the same selected PTY name The PTY Personality Persnlty function only operates when in the FM mode Public Public The radio display will flash SEEK and the selected PTY Rhythm and Blues R amp B program type when searching for the next PTY station If Religious Music Rel Musc no station is found with the selected PTY program type Religious Talk Rel Talk the radio will return to the last preset station Rock Rock If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Soft Soft Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio Soft Rock Soft Rck will tune to the preset station ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Pressing PTY then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop at all RDS stations Each RDS station will be pl
290. t of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove fill plug B then drain plug C Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft Ibs 20 34 N m EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 CAUTION When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Front Rear Axle Fluid The front axle has a threaded fill plug on the cover plate and a threaded drain plug on the bottom side of the carrier Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be 1 2 1 cm below the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Recommended Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme 338 MAINTAININ
291. t restraint should only be ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a cannot sit with knees bent over the seat cushion while deploying passenger airbag which may cause se the child s back is against the seatback they need a vere or fatal injuries to the infant belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield restraint and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion M i e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it e For additional information refer to www seatcheck org has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety or call 1 866 SEATCHECK 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Standards The manufacturer recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locki
292. t use seat belts heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Cargo Organizer If Equipped 1 To raise the cargo organizer pull up on the handle and This vehicle may be equipped with a cargo organizerthat pull towards the rear of the vehicle mounts on the floor behind the rear seat Items may be placed on the flat surface or stored in the three storage compartments WARNING e To avoid tipping lock the shelf securely in all positions e Do not drive this vehicle with the liftgate open or use the shelf as a seat e Failure to follow these warnings could result in serious or fatal injury C nh Organiset N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 2 Place the rear corners of the cargo organizer into the supports located on the rear trim panel Press down on the back of the cargo organizer to lock it into place Do not load objects over 30 Ibs 13 5 kg in the upper position Failure to follow this warning could cause the cargo organizer to collapse resulting in personal injury CAUTION Do not load objects over 100 Ibs 45 kg in the lower position Failure to follow this could cause damage to the cargo organizer Cargo Organizer Mounting 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Open Storage Compartments 1 Pull up on the center opening of the cargo organizer Using Cargo Organizer 2 Lift up on the storag
293. tem checked by an authorized dealer 24 OID Overdrive Off Indicator Light o p This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected The O D OFF button is located on the gear shift lever 25 Seat Belt Indicator Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Re minder System BeltAlert in the Occupant Restraints section for more information 26 Light Bar Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates when the light bar lamps are on D UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 27 Water In Fuel Warning Light If Equipped This light indicates water has collected in the A Kd fuel filter and should be drained immediately w See your authorized dealer for service See page 220 for more information 28 Low Coolant Warning Light If Equipped EL This light comes on if the coolant level is low This light will come on for 3 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position 29 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light If Equipped This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control system If a
294. tem is designed system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag an authorized dealer service the system promptly system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way take the vehicle to Does not come on during the 6 to 8 seconds after the your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat ignition switch is first turned on accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities con tact your authorized dealer e You need proper knee impact protection in a colli sion Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equip ment on or behind the knee bolsters e t is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system e Remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval e Comes on for any period of time while driving mmmmmE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Child Restraint WARNING Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny States and all Canadian provinces require that small baby
295. ter Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freein
296. tere eR n 173 Bulb Replacement 04 351 Carp cits e 9 Rex e UP Rd E ese 117 151 Center Mounted Stop 00 355 CAUSE ugs te ke Ve ee EAE Aqe bee Y 172 Daytime Running leeren 120 Dimmer Switch Headlight 117 119 Doe z2eszissGekaca ca ere GREY 130 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 175 ln DD 120 353 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 169 FUSES 4 53 2 po rea a E P hoe qu RES 342 Hazard Warning Flasher 292 Headlight Switch pe Rm 119 Headlights sn cas bia karst ein eae mes 119 351 Headlights On Reminder 120 408 INDEX aa Headlights On With Wipers 119 High Beam Indicator 200 168 Instrument Cluster 0 0 0 0 eee 119 Intensity Control 2 0 2 0 117 Interlof seei ahs Rhee he ee eee Y ee 117 Lights On Reminder 000 120 Low Fuel ccce bae R3 REY eka 174 Malfunction Indicator liess 169 Map Reading ess ue y e ed eens 118 Oil Pressure lees 172 Park 2d de ERYacbu e ranton Reda 119 PASSING cs ein nae ede emer rade cette 119 Reading ue Ee ue EU He ET eee Ea 130 Rear Servicing isses kara skat ec 355 Rear Tail 44 3 onto eE ore deed 355 Seat Belt Reminder less 175 eaa cq P C mp 351 Side Marker leen 355 Transfer Case 2 1 ee 173 174 en INDEX 409 Transmission Warning sess 172 Turn Signal i r RR
297. tes may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have NOTE e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the voice on beep say Pair a Phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process The UConnect system will then prompt you to begin the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular phone Before attempting to pair phone please see your cellular phone s user manual Bluetooth section for instructions on how to complete this step For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect Syst
298. test at about 12 mph 20 km h If for any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph 20 km h this check will be delayed until 25 mph 40 km h The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test and during an ABS stop to provide the regulated hydraulic pressure The motor pump makes a low humming noise during operation this is normal During off road use loss of traction can temporarily m defeat the system and cause the warning light to illumi nate Turn the ignition OFF and ON again to restore Anti Lock Brake System function 248 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE WARNING WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natu their effectiveness and may lead to an accident ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just can it increase braking or steering efficiency be press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle slow down or stop brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safe
299. the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle Cargo Tie Down Hooks The tie downs located on cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving Cargo Tie Down Hooks N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight e Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or colli vehicle to sway sion a hook could pull loose e rae the child e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the E seat to come loose child could be badly injured seatback This could impair visibility or become a Use only the anehe provided S05 shuld seat dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision tethers WARNING To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control result ing in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Pu
300. the system off when you are not using it OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The overhead console contains dome reading lights an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink an optional sunroof switch and an Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC that consists of the following e Compass temperature display e Trip information displays e Vehicle information warning message displays e Customer programmable features 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pressing the MENU button will change the displayed programming features Pressing the STEP button will select the available choices Pressing the C T Compass Temperature button will return the display to the normal compass temperature display NOTE Temperature accuracy can be effected from heat soak For best accuracy the vehicle should be driven at a speed greater than 20 mph 32 km h for several min utes Dome Reading Lights Located in the overhead console are two dome reading lights 810aa7c0 Dome Reading Lamps The dome reading lights illuminate when a door or the swing gate is opened or when the interior lights are turned on by rotating the dimmer control located on the multi function lever The reading lights are activated by pressing on the e recessed area of the corresponding lens NOTE The dome reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving t
301. ther use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know what your options are at any prompt say Help following the voice on beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the mirror Cancel Command At any prompt after the voice on beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone re fer to Introduction section to learn about the phone type To complete the pairing process you will need to reference your cellular phone owner s manual One of the following vehicle specific websi
302. there to protect you These protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi fication System refer to Occupant Classification Sys tem in this section has determined the seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the child category This could be a child a teenager or even a small adult If your vehicle is so equipped the window bag on the crash side
303. ting the control for the dimmer switch on the multi function control lever fully upward or by pressing the Unlock button on the keyfob The overhead lights will automatically turn off in about 8 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Rear Cargo Light The rear cargo light includes an independent On Off switch which when off will not allow the illumination of any interior lighting when the rear swing gate or flipper glass is opened All other methods of turning the interior lighting on off will function normally regardless of the rear cargo light switch position Dimmer Control With the park lights or headlights on rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multi function control lever upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights Rotating the control completely upward turns on the dome light 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Daytime Brightness Feature Certain components odometer radio etc can be illumi nated at full brightness during the daytime This can be helpful when driving with your headlights on during the daytime such as in a parade or a funeral procession To activate this feature rotate the multi function control lever one detent lower than the dome light Front Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted in the overhead console Each li
304. to force fresh outside air into the vehicle No 1 diesel fuel This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax plugging of the fuel filters e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 NOTE DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends that this vehicle should be operated using Diesel fuel with 15 ppm Sulfur or less where it is available WARNING Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent They can be unstable under certain conditions and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water To prevent fuel system trouble drain the accumulated water from the fuel water separator using the fuel water separator drain provided If you buy good quality fuel and follow the cold weather advice above fuel conditioners should not be required in your vehicle If available in your area a high cetane premium diesel fuel may offer improved cold starting and warm up performance FUEL TANK FILLER CAP GAS CAP WARNING To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling CAUTION DO NOT put gasoline in your diesel vehicle if equipped If you accidentally put gasoline in your vehicle DO NOT start the engine This will cause damage to the fuel system Have the fuel system flushed 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The gas c
305. tomer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 396 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools an
306. ton without pressing and holding within 23 50 feet 7 15 meters of the vehicle by per forming the following procedure 1 Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter 2 Continue to hold the Unlock button wait at least 4 but no longer than 10 seconds then press the Rear Release button 3 Release both buttons 4 Repeating steps 1 3 will restore original transmitter operation NOTE Unlatching the flip up window will unlock the swing gate After closing the flip up window press the Lock button on the transmitter to lock the swing gate Panic Alarm The panic mode flashes the park lights and sounds the horn for about 3 minutes or until the alarm is turned off To Use the Panic Alarm Press and hold the PANIC button for at least 1 second to activate the panic alarm Press and hold the PANIC button a second time to deactivate the alarm The alarm will also shut itself off after starting the vehicle and accelerating to 15 mph 24 km h NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Program Additional Transmitters NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in th
307. tracks on the se lected disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks Press the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward feature If TUNE RW is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press button 4 a second time to stop Random Play MODE Press the MODE button to select between the tape player CD player or satellite radio if equipped To select Satellite Radio if equipped press the MODE button until the word SIRIUS appears The following will be displayed in this order After three seconds the current channel name and number will be displayed for five seconds The current program type and channel number will then be displayed for five seconds The current channel name and number will then be displayed until an action occurs A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the Satellite Radio mode Tape CD Button Press this button to select between CD player and Tape player es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Time Button Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day Scan Button Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time CD Changer Control Capability If Equipped This radio is compatible with a remote m
308. ty of others EN STARTING AND OPERATING 249 CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele phones NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2 wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS When To Use 4L or 4LO Low Range When off road driving shift to 4L or 4LO for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situatio
309. ufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than allowed in the United States MMT is pro hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline es STARTING AND OPERATING 279 Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting fro
310. uid X 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 386 SCHEDULE A DIESEL ENGINES MEM sary t Miles 62 500 75 000 87 500 100 000 Kilometers 100 000 120 000 140 000 160 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element Replace as neces X X X X sary Replace the engine air filter element X X Inspect the boost pressure solenoid filter Replace as nec X X X X essary Replace the boost pressure solenoid filter if not previ X ously replaced Replace the fuel filter water separator unit X X Replace the engine timing belt and idler pulleys X Inspect the engine timing belt tensioner replace if neces X Flush and replace the engine coolant en SCHEDULE A DIESEL ENGINES 387 Miles 62 500 75 000 87 500 100 000 Kilometers 100 000 120 000 140 000 160 000 Replace the engine accessory drive belt X Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the transfer case fluid X t The replacement of such component is requested if there is superficial wear bearing clearance or evident grease leak Inspection and service should be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all receipts M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 Information Provided by DEALER IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSIS
311. uipped 121 Interior Lights eR REED 117 Hi Windshield Wipers And Washers 123 Front Map Reading Lights 118 Windshield Washers lesus 124 Multi Function Control Lever 118 Mist Feature i desee y aes enna aes 125 Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights And Windshield Wiper Operation 125 Mur PLE ini Intermittent Wiper System 125 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 119 H Tilt Steering Column lees 126 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 H Electronic Speed Control 00 0 127 When Your Vehicle Is New 140 TO Ac vale a cese ka cee age E hates 127 Programming Homelink 141 To Set At A Desired Speed 128 Gate Operator Canadian Programming 144 To Deactivate 44s cada Rr pas 128 Using Homelink To Resume Speed 0000 128 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 145 To Vary The Speed Setting 128 Express Open Feature ies 2240 baa es 147 To Accelerate For Passing 129 Sunroof Maintenance 0 0 147 Mi Overhead Console If Equipped 1297 EUOWEFOBSUUBU n eek ase doe CROIRE de wees 148 Dome Reading Lights i4 4i kx e 130 MCtp Molders aec os 3 x EY RECS 150 Ele
312. um your carpet regularly to prevent a soil build up Shampoo soiled carpet with a reliable upholstery cleaner using a natural sponge or soft bristle brush After carpet dries vacuum it thoroughly Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Maintenance After Off Pavement Driving After extended operation in mud sand or water or similar dirty conditions have your brake drums brake linings and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as possible This will prevent any abrasive material from causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action Following off pavement usage completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and suspen sion Retighten if required to torque values specified in the Service Manual Also check for accumulations of 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN vegetation or brush that could become a fire hazard or FUSE PANEL conceal damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals
313. ur vehicle The two wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited to a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read this manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particu larly those used for braking steering and transmission and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload it or expect it to overcome the laws of nature Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Section 5 of this manual Roll Over Warning Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance higher center of gravity and narrower track than many passenger cars It is capable of perform ing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can be caused to go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns or
314. urity Alarm System must first be source that has a greater than 12 volt system i e do disabled by cycling a front door key cylinder or by using not use a 24 volt power source the keyless entry transmitter Never attempt to jump start a discharged battery that is frozen because it could rupture or explode during WARNING jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous To avoid personal e Be sure your vehicle is not touching the jump start injury or damage to electrical components in vehicle vehicle observe the following warnings Observe all Battery Warnings in Section 7 of this manual while jump starting your vehicle e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301 CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks they are mounted in the front and the rear tow truck hookup or highway towing You could da
315. urn the radio on Turn the volume control clockwise to increase the volume 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss NOTE Power to operate the radio is controlled by the ignition switch It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between AM FM the CD changer and Sirius Satellite Radio if equipped The display will show ST when a stereo station is received To select Sirius Satellite Radio if equipped press the MODE button until the word SIRIUS appears The fol lowing will be displayed in this order After three sec onds the current channel name and number will be displayed for five seconds The current program type and channel number will then be displayed for five seconds The current channel name and number will then be displayed until an action occurs CD s may remain in the player while in the Satellite Radio mode Seek Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either the AM or FM mode Press the top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding the button in will by pass stations without stopping until you release it Tune Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency If the button is pressed and held the radio will continue to tune until the button is released The frequency will be displayed an
316. ven fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked 6 Way Power Seat with Manual Recliner The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the seat up or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat Power Seat Switches 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to Heated Seats If Equipped the rear of the power seat switch Pull up on the lever to The heated seat switch is located on the outboard side of the front seats Pressing this switch to its desired setting HI or LO will activate the respective heating element for the heated seat recline the seat Recline Control Lever Heated Seat Switches N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Once the heated seat switch is activated depressing it a WARNING second time will de activate it 65 35 Split Folding Rear Seat e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front
317. ver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range Normal street and highway driving Dry hard surfaced roads 4 PART TIME Part Time 4 Wheel Drive High Range Locks the transfer case inter axle differential Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4 FULL TIME Full Time 4 Wheel Drive High Range Employs an inter axle differential This allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds on all road surfaces es STARTING AND OPERATING 243 N Neutral Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Sec tion 5 for more information 4LO Part Time 4 Wheel Drive Low Range Low speed 4 wheel drive Locks the transfer case inter axle differ ential Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Shifting Procedure 2WD to 4 PART TIME or 4 PART TIME to 2WD Shifting between 2WD and 4 PART TIME can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 55 mph 88 km h With the vehicle in motion two momentary releas
318. we dace aed So RP WE Cae e 342 Garage Door Opener llle 139 Gas Cap esca ee dee ee ea cus 281 309 Gasoline os 3324 wis See ee E FERAE E 276 Gasoline Reformulated 277 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 278 Gauges Coolant Temperature sasiad eana e 171 FUG tg xe heh EE E EEE E ae es 174 Odometer 22er aca ean is ERA eg 171 Speedom tet i444 94 idee mi PEE 168 Tachometer lee 168 Gear Ranges ue s dea anc d eS 229 231 General Information llle 273 Glass Cleaning 23 ee ED dds bea tee ba 340 Hands Free Phone llle 85 Hazard Warning Flasher 292 Head Restraints llle 110 Head Rests va doe a Ea ge des EI ea 110 Headlights 22 39 ep d ete ES 119 Bulb Replacement 2004 351 High Beam i i n Re en 168 Lights On Reminder 000 120 PASSING xus tueenend a ied gaan g e E 119 Replacing lle 351 SWICK iud oa ea acaba aed a ga eee aed 3 119 Heated Mirrors ier waa Ya aN e 84 Heated Seats llle 112 Heater Engine Block 000000 226 Holder Cup 25 34 gies bik odie E edens 150 Homelink Transmitter sls 139 Hood Release i cratis 116 zh s eT 330 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid 0 335 en INDEX 407 Identifying Your Engine 306 307 Ignition Key node Su RM e ae BS ee el uis 14 Wiring System eee eee eee e eee 319 Il
319. when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range If the pointer rises to the red zone five chimes will occur pull over and stop the vehicle Do not turn the engine off Idle the vehicle with the air conditioning turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the engine remains in the high range turn the engine off and call for service 12 Reset Button Press this button to toggle between the odometer and trip odometer display When in the trip odometer mode holding the button in resets the trip odometer Also pressing the Reset button will clear out any warning messages in the odometer display 13 Odometer Trip Odometer Avacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven Also the cluster will display replacing the odometer trip odometer vehicle warning messages such as door gate glass ajar and low washer fluid See appropriate sections for more information NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the overhead console all warnings including door GATE GLASS and LOWASH will only be displayed in the 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se EVIC display not in the instrument cluster For addi tional information refer to Overhead Console If Equipped in Section 3 U S federal regulations require that upon transfer o
320. y Rear Jacking Location 80135497 Front Jacking Location 298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install lug nuts with cone shaped end toward wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 130 N m 95 ft Ibs If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to it s fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE NOTE Check the charge indic
321. y damage the CD player mechanism You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the display will show the time of day If the power is ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one Seek Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection EJT Eject Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the radio mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The unit will continue in radio mode The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF except on convertibles ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 FF TUNE RW Press FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner Random Play RND Program Button 4 Press the RND button 4 button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the tracks on the selected disc in random order to provide an interest ing chang

Owners Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents